You are on page 1of 382

Reference Manual

AMS Suite:
Machinery Health Manager
Online System Software

Monitor

Applications for the CSI 4500 and 6500 Machinery Health

Part # 97460.10

Copyright
2010 by Emerson Process Management.
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted,
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into
any language in any form by any means without the written
permission of Emerson Process Management.
Disclaimer
This manual is provided for informational purposes.
EMERSON PROCESS MANAGEMENT MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Emerson Process Management
shall not be liable for errors, omissions, or inconsistencies
that may be contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. Information in this document
is subject to change without notice and does not represent a
commitment on the part of Emerson Process Management.
The information in this manual is not all-inclusive and
cannot cover all unique situations.
Product Support
Should you have any comments on this documentation or
questions concerning the Agreement on the following
pages, please contact Emerson Process Managements
Product Support Department.
Addresses:
The Americas and Canada
Emerson Process Management
835 Innovation Drive
Knoxville, TN 37932 USA
Phone: 865-675-4274
FAX: 865-218-1416
mhm.custserv@emersonprocess.com
Europe and Middle East
Emerson Process Management
Research Park Inerleuvenlaan 50 Leuven 3001 Belgium
Phone: 32/16/74/.14.71
UK 441516779418
FAX: 32/16/74.14.19

ii

emacust@emersonprocess.com
Asia Pacific
Emerson Process Management Asia Pacific Pte Ltd
1 Pandan Crescent
Singapore 128461
Phone: 65.67708706
FAX: 65.67708006
MHM-TechSupport@AP.EmersonProcess.com
Worldwide Web:
http://www.MHM.AssetWeb.com
AMS Suite: Machinery Health Manager Online
Software Reference Manual
This document was written, illustrated, and produced by
Emerson Process Managements Engineering Publications
Group on Power Macintosh workstations using Adobe
FrameMaker, Adobe PhotoShop, and Macromedia FreeHand. Printed copies are produced using the Xerox
DocuTech publishing system.
Trademarks and Servicemarks
Emerson Process Management logo; Infranalysis; InfraRoute; MachineView; MotorView; Nspectr; OilView
(Japan); AMS Machinery Manager; Reliability-Based
Maintenance, and logo; are registered trademarks of
Emerson Process Management.
PeakVue; RBMview; AMS Machinery Manager (Australia,
China, Japan); RBMwizard; Reliability-Based Maintenance (Venezuela); SonicScan; SST; VibPro; and VibView
are pending trademarks of Emerson Process Management.
Lubricant Profile and Trivector are registered servicemarks
of Emerson Process Management.
RBM; AMS Machinery Manager (China); ReliabilityBased Maintenance (Venezuela); and design are pending
servicemarks of Emerson Process Management.
Adobe is a trademark and FrameMaker and PhotoShop are
registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Inc. Power Macintosh is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. Macromedia
is a registered trademark and FreeHand is a trademark of
Macromedia, Inc. Xerox and DocuTech are trademarks of
Xerox Corporation.
All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

License Agreement
IMPORTANT: CAREFULLY READ ALL THE TERMS
AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT BEFORE
OPENING THE PACKAGE OR PROCEEDING WITH
INSTALLATION. OPENING THE PACKAGE OR COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION INDICATES YOUR
ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT,
CANCEL ANY INSTALLATION AND PROMPTLY
RETURN THIS PRODUCT AND THE ASSOCIATED
DOCUMENTATION TO CSI, AND YOUR MONEY
WILL BE REFUNDED. NO REFUNDS WILL BE GIVEN
FOR PRODUCTS WITH DAMAGED OR MISSING
COMPONENTS.
Definition of Software
As used herein, software refers to any computer program
contained on any medium. Software includes downloadable
firmware for use in devices such as analyzers or MotorStatus units and it includes computer programs executable on
computers or computer networks.
Software License
You have the non-exclusive right to use this software on
only one device at a time. You may back-up the software for
archival purposes. For network systems, you have the nonexclusive right to install this software on only one server.
Read/write access is limited to the number of concurrent use
licenses purchased. The number of guest-only accesses is up
to a maximum of 250.
CSI grants you a non-exclusive right to use the Software
solely for your own internal data processing operations on
the CSI designated supported operating platform for up to
any applicable maximum number of licensed users. You
may not relicense the Software or use the Software for third
party training, commercial time sharing, rental, or service
bureau use. Client may not use the Software in, as, or with
an ASP (Application Service Provider).
Software Updates
CSI agrees to provide you, at no charge except for media,
preparation and shipping charges, for one (1) year from the
date of purchase, all updates to the software made at the sole
discretion of CSI. Should you purchase a software support
agreement for the next succeeding year following the first

year from the date of purchase, and thereafter on an annual


basis, and if CSI is still providing support, you may purchase the same, annually, at the then existing rate.
Updates/Upgrades
Upon receipt of new CSI software replacing older CSI software, you have 30 days to install and test the new CSI software on the same or a different device. At the end of the 30day test period, you must both remove and return the new
CSI software or remove the older CSI software.
Ownership
The licensed software and all derivatives are the sole property of Computational Systems, Inc. You may not disassemble, decompile, reverse engineer or otherwise translate the
licensed program. You may not distribute copies of the program or documentation, in whole or in part, to another party.
You may not in any way distort, or otherwise modify the
program or any part of the documentation without prior
written consent from CSI.
Transfer
You may transfer the software and license to another party
only with the written consent of CSI and only if the other
party agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. If you transfer the program, you must transfer
the documentation and any backup copies or transfer only
the documentation and destroy any backup copies.
Copyright
The software and documentation are copyrighted. All rights
are reserved.
Termination
If you commit a material breach of this Agreement, CSI
may terminate the Agreement by written notice.
Virus Disclaimer
CSI uses the latest virus checking technologies to test all its
software. However, since no antivirus system is 100% reliable, we strongly advise that you use an anti-virus system in
which you have confidence to verify the software is virusfree. CSI makes no representations or warranties to the
effect that the licensed software is virus-free.
NO WARRANTY
THE PROGRAM IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" WITHOUT
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR

iii

IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY


WARRANTIES OR MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND REMEDIES
IN NO EVENT WILL CSI BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY
THIRD PARTY FOR ANY DAMAGES,
INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS,
OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR THE
INABILITY TO USE THIS PROGRAM.
THE LICENSEE'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY
IN THE EVENT OF A DEFECT

IN WORKMANSHIP OR MATERIAL IS
EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE REPLACEMENT
OF THE DISKETTES OR OTHER MEDIA. IN NO
EVENT WILL CSI'S LIABILITY EXCEED THE
PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT.
Export Restrictions
You agree to comply fully with all laws, regulations, decrees
and orders of the Unites States of America that restrict or
prohibit the exportation (or re-exportation) of technical data
and/or the direct product of it to other countries, including,
without limitation, the U.S. Export Administration Regulations.
U.S. Government Rights
When provided to the U.S. government, the computer software and related materials and documentation are provided
subject to the same license rights as those enumerated
above.
Hardware Technical Help
1. Please have the number of the current version of your
firmware ready when you call. The version of the
firmware in Emerson Process Managements CSI 2100
series, CSI 2400, and other analyzers appears on the
power-up screen that is displayed when the analyzer is
turned on.
2. If you have a problem, explain the exact nature of your
problem. For example, what are the error messages?
When do they occur? Know what you were doing
when the problem occurred. For example, what mode
were you in? What steps did you go through? Try to
determine before you call whether the problem is
repeatable.

iv

Hardware Repair
Emerson Process Management repairs and updates its hardware products free for one year from the date of purchase.
This service warranty includes hardware improvement,
modification, correction, recalibration, update, and maintenance for normal wear. This service warranty excludes
repair of damage from misuse, abuse, neglect, carelessness,
or modification performed by anyone other than Emerson
Process Management.
After the one year service warranty expires, each return of
a Emerson Process Management hardware product is subject to a minimum service fee. If the cost of repair exceeds
this minimum fee, we will call you with an estimate before
performing any work. Contact Emerson Process Managements Product Support Department for information concerning the current rates.
Obsolete Hardware
Although Emerson Process Management will honor all
contractual agreements and will make every effort to ensure
that its software packages are backward compatible, to
take advantage of advances in newer hardware platforms
and to keep our programs reasonably small, Emerson Process Management reserves the right to discontinue support
for old or out-of-date hardware items.
Software Technical Help
1. Please have the number of the current version of your
software ready when you call. The version number for
software operating under Windows is displayed by
selecting About under the Help menu bar item.
2. If you have a problem, explain the exact nature of your
problem. For example, what are the error messages?
(If possible, make a printout of the error message.)
When do they occur? Know what you were doing
when the problem occurred. For example, what mode
were you in? What steps did you go through? Try to
determine before you call whether the problem is
repeatable.
3. Please be at your computer when you call. We can
serve you better when we can work through the
problem together.
Software Technical Support
Emerson Process Management provides technical support
through the following for those under support agreement:

Telephone assistance and communication via the


Internet.
Mass updates that are released during that time.
Interim updates upon request. Please contact Emerson
Process Management Product Support for more
information.
Returning Items
1. Call Product Support (see page 2) to obtain a return
authorization number. Please write it clearly and
prominently on the outside of the shipping container.
2. If returning for credit, return all accessories originally
shipped with the item(s). Include cables, software
diskettes, manuals, etc.
3. Enclose a note that describes the reason(s) you are
returning the item(s).
4. Insure your package for return shipment. Shipping
costs and any losses during shipment are your
responsibility. COD packages cannot be accepted and
will be returned unopened.

vi

Contents
Chapter 1 Read This First
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Special Emphasis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Contents of this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Online Software System Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Data Collection and Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Online Config Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Database Objects Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Online Watch Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Online Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Online Client Application Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19

Chapter 2 Online Configuration


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Step 1 - Open a Database Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Step 2 - Configure the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Step 3 - Create Predicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Step 4 - Define the Equipment to be Monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Step 5 - Connect to an Online Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Step 6 - Commission the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Step 7 - Define Data Collection Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Step 8 - Begin Routine Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Step 9 - Define Trip Predicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Step 10 - Transient Channel Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Step 11 - Define Auto-Archive Predicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Chapter 3 Online Watch


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Users Guide Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

vii

Executing Online Watch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3


Connecting to an Online Server [Ctrl+N, Alt-F-C] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Navigating the Hierarchical Database View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Monitoring System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
How System Status is Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Viewing Current Status and Data Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
When an Alarm Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Using the Alarm Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Purpose of the Alarm Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Alarm Count and Display Check Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Column Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Alarm List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Modifying Alarm Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Converting a Custom AL Set to a Standard AL Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Making Alarm Limit Changes to a CSI 4500 .RBM database . . . . . 3-31
Requesting Demand Acquisitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Roll Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Requesting Live Trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Managing a Transient System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Installing the Standalone Online Watch Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Adding functionality to the Standalone Online Watch Client . . . 3-41
Reference Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Main Application Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Signal Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Context Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Data Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Alarm Limit Dialog Box [Alt-T-E] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Live Trend Window [Alt-T-L] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Demand Acquisition Dialog Box [Alt-T-D] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Manage Working Folders Dialog Box [Ctrl+F, Alt-V-F] . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Options Dialog Box [Alt-T-O] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Graphics Key Dialog Box [Alt-H-G] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63

viii

User Roles and Polices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-64


-- Fallback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66

Appendix A Creating and Configuring Hardware


Creating CSI 4500 Units in the Online Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Discovery Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Offline Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Configuring the CSI 4500 Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Channel Definition Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer Channel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital I/O Channel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generic Operations for Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Constant Tachs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-13
A-14
A-28
A-37
A-40
A-41
A-42

Appendix B Defining Equipment to be Monitored


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
The Logical Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Measurement Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20

Appendix C Analysis Parameter and Alarm Limit Sets


Analysis Parameter Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Data Acquisition Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Analysis Parameters Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Alarm Limit Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
Phase Alarm Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16

Appendix D Data Collection Sets


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Adding a Data Collection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2

ix

Collection Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-8


Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-10
Validation of DCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-13

Appendix E Predicates
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Using Predicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Comparison. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Boolean Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Evaluating Predicate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Creating Predicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
Standard Predicates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
Trip Predicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9
Radial Trip Predicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10
Thrust Trip Predicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16

Appendix F Commissioning
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Vibration Signal Channel Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
Acquisition Definition Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5
Channel Setup Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8
Data Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9
View Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10
Process Signal Channel Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-12
Tach Channel Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-13
Digital I/O Channel Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-20
Commissioning the Transient Subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-22

Appendix G Plot Control User Interface Functions


Right-Click in Plot Graph Region [Alt+F3]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-1
Right-Click in Region Below Plot X-Axis [ALT+F2] . . . . . . . . . . . .G-4
Right-Click in Plot Region Left of the Y-Axis [ALT+F1]. . . . . . . . .G-5
Other Keyboard Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-6

Appendix H Online Server Program


Online Server INI File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
Architecture Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3

Appendix I Modifying and Archiving Databases


Online and Offline Database Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making Online Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making Offline Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Archiving a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I-1
I-1
I-3
I-6

CSI 4500/6500 Modbus Format and Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1
Modbus Remapping Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-53
Entry Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-53
Mapping and EGU Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-57
Mapping Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-60
Modbus Virtual Address Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-60
Automatic Virtual Address Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-60
Manual Virtual Address Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-61
Convert Engineering Units Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-63
Renumbering Virtual Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-64
Potential Mapping Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-67
Database .CSV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-68
Miscellaneous Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-68

xi

xii

Chapter

Read This First

Introduction
Note

The phrase CSI 4500 refers to all the models in the CSI 4500 series. Where
a particular model is referred to separately, it is referred to by name. For
example, when the CSI 4500R is referred to separately, it is called CSI
4500R and information discussed refers to that model.
The CSI 4500 Machinery Health MonitorTM and Online System Software for AMS
Machinery Manager make up a powerful system for continuous monitoring of plant equipment. The CSI 4500 online system provides the tools and applications for database setup
and management, hardware commissioning, and daily monitoring.
The CSI 4500 Machinery Health Monitor brings the time-proven analysis techniques of
the CSI 2120 and CSI 2130 RBMconsultant portable analyzer to the world of continuous
equipment monitoring.
The CSI 4500 is a distributed data collection unit designed for mission-critical equipment
health monitoring applications. Its adaptive, event-driven data collection and exceptionbased data reporting are optimized for use with production processes where downtime due
to equipment failure or unscheduled maintenance is particularly expensive.
This system is well suited to any application where continuous monitoring coverage is preferred, or where human presence is unfeasible and a battery-powered unit offers insufficient
capacity. The CSI 4500 unit is CE certified for EMI, RF Emissions and Susceptibility,
Static Discharge and Surge Withstand. It is also available in an FM approved package
(Class1, Division 2, Group C and D, T4).
The online system software, as a fully integrated part of Emersons AMS Machinery Manager package, contributes an exciting extension to this suite of applications, which already
provides a multi-technology environment for equipment health analysis.

1-1

As an enhancement to the traditional DCS or SCADA system, the CSI 4500 online system
introduces the concept of monitoring the equipment used by a process in addition to the
process itself. The system extends Emersons Reliability-Based Maintenance message
onto the production floor with Reliability Based Production - helping to ensure the continued availability of critical process equipment.
This document is the Users Manual for the application software portion of the CSI 4500
Online Health Monitoring System.

1-2

Read This First

Special Emphasis
The following conventions are used throughout this text to call attention to the adjacent text:
Note

A note indicates special comments or instructions.

Caution!

A caution indicates actions that may have a major impact on the software,
database files, etc.

Warning!

Warnings indicate actions that may endanger your health or safety, or that
may damage equipment.

1-3

Contents of this Manual


Chapter 1 Introduction

Chapter one provides an overview of the CSI 4500 Online system software, including
explanations of the various system components and the database architecture.
Chapter 2 Online Config

Chapter two provides an explanation of the Online Config application. This chapter takes
the form of a hypothetical situation that describes how a typical piece of equipment would
be configured using the Online Config application. Numerous cross references direct you
to other parts of the manual that provide detailed instructions for certain concepts and procedures.
Chapter 3 Online Watch

Chapter three provides a complete explanation of the Online Watch application. This
chapter provides both a practical explanation section and a reference section for more specific information on each of Online Watchs screens and functions.
Appendix A - Defining Equipment to be Monitored

Appendix A is a reference section that explains how to use Online Config to define the
equipment to be monitored by your Online system.
Appendix B - Creating and Configuring Hardware

Appendix B provides explanations for each screen used in setting up online databases and
configuring CSI 4500 units.
Appendix C - Analysis Parameter and Alarm Limit Sets

Appendix C is a reference section that explains how to create and use Analysis Parameter
and Alarm Limit Sets within your Online systems database.
Appendix D - Data Collection Sets

Appendix D is a reference section that explains Data Collection Sets, including how to
create and customize them using the Online Config application.
Appendix E - Predicates

Appendix E is a reference section that explains the concept of Predicates as they are used
in the CSI 4500 Online system. This section also explains how to create and define Predicates using the Online Config application.

1-4

Read This First

Appendix F - Commissioning

Appendix F is a reference section that explains the concept of Commissioning the channels
on your CSI 4500 units. This appendix provides step-by-step instructions for Commissioning using the Online Config application.
Appendix G - Plot Control User Interface Functions

Appendix G is a reference section that provides an explanation of the functions performed


internally by Plot Control in response to user commands.
Appendix H - Online Server Program

Appendix H is a reference section that provides information on the .INI file and architecture
updates.
Appendix I - Modifying and Archiving Databases

Appendix I provides information on making online and offline database modifications.


Appendix J - Modbus/TCP CSI 4500 Slave

Appendix J is a reference section on the reference values and register assignments available
in the CSI 4500 and how they relate to Modbus register values.

1-5

Overview
The CSI 4500 Machinery Health Monitor series provides a continuous online, vibration
monitoring system. What exactly does this mean? Lets look at some precise definitions
associated with the CSI 4500:
Continuous - Uninterrupted in time or sequence; unceasing; roundtheclock.
Online - Accessible by a computer, particularly over a network; being in process.
Vibration - The act or state of being moved back and forth rapidly on both sides of
a center position.
Monitoring - Recording or controlling an activity or process; to check for significant content; to keep watch over; supervise.
System - A group of elements that interact and function together as a whole.
Here we have a group of elements (computer hardware and associated software) functioning together as a whole. Their purpose is to keep watch over equipment around the
clock, record the motion of that equipment, check for significant content, and make that
information available by computer over a network while the process is actively running.
There are several benefits of this type of installation:
It is continuous There is no loss of coverage in time due to a lack of monitoring
presence by personnel.
It is online The results of analysis are available remotely over the network; certain tuning and configuration changes may be made remotely.
It is automatic The information is presented and stored without manual intervention.
It is timely Because the system is continuous, online, and automatic, the relevant information for supporting decision making is available immediately.

1-6

Read This First

Online Software System Architecture


The following diagram shows a schematic overview of the CSI 4500 Online System and
its relation to AMS Machinery Manager:

Model 4500 Online System Overview Diagram

This type of system is fairly complex. There are numerous issues of keeping the remote
monitoring units synchronized with the database configuration. Multiple clients may make
requests simultaneously. In short, there needs to be some coordinating agent to help keep
everything playing together nicely.
Online Server

For the CSI 4500 online system this agent is the Online Server. Online Server is a server
application that is the central hub of activity for the online system. It is responsible for serializing and processing all requests from all clients, synchronizing data sent to and displayed
by all clients, sending configuration information to and receiving data from the CSI 4500
hardware units, and storing data in the AMS Machinery Manager database.

Overview

1-7

For more information, please see Online Server on page 1-18. Although it is an extremely
important part of the system, it is almost entirely hidden from view and does not require a
userlevel discussion.
Online Config

Once you have a mechanism for coordinating the monitoring units and handling the data
they produce, you need an application that can manage their configuration. Online Config
is a client application that is responsible for configuring the online system. This includes
database setup and hardware commissioning. Using Online Config you will setup the
online database to be used by the system. For an online system it is useful if this application
can manually control the units remotely for system commissioning purposes. This helps the
people who must ensure the system is operating correctly by giving them a means for end
toend validation of signal paths. For an overview of the Online Config client application
please see Online Config Client on page 1-12. A detailed discussion of its operation is presented in Chapter 2.
Online Watch

Finally, there needs to be a means for presenting the live status of the system to appropriate
personnel. Whether process operators or maintenance staff, access to the current live status
of all the equipment being monitored is the ultimate purpose of the system. The ability to
track and acknowledge alarm conditions, change alarm set points, and manually request
remote acquisition of spectral data are all part of what is provided by the Online Watch
client application.
For an overview of this mostvisible member of the online system, please see Online
Watch Client on page 1-16. A detailed discussion of its operation is presented in Chapter 3
of this manual.
4500M Units

These units serve as the interface between the actual monitoring points and the systems
online server. The CSI 4500M also provides the interface for tachometer input and digital
I/O connections. Depending on the card configuration, each 4500M unit can support 32
mixed AC or DC signal input channels, 16 tachometer channels, and 16 digital I/O channels.
4500MS Units

The CSI 4500MS can support 12 mixed AC or DC signal input channels, 2 tachometer
channels, and 2 digital I/O channels.

1-8

Read This First

4500T Units

The Model 4500T adds support for transient to the 4500M units. It does this via the addition
of a CSI 4500 Transient Daughterboard and one or two Transient Filter Boards. This gives
users the ability to configure their CSI 4500 system to continuously store 16 or 32 channels
of parallel time waveform data. All collected time waveform data, along with overall level
data and up to 4 tachometer channels are stored continuously for the configured transient
channels.
The data storage location can be configured to either the provided internal hard drive or an
external network accessible storage (NAS) drive. The data is written to the hard drive in a
circular first in/first out (FIFO) fashion. The duration of the data will depend on the number
of channels configured for transient and the size of the hard drive. When the drive fills up,
the oldest data is overwritten with new data.
In addition, when a Transient Filter Board and daughter card is present, the CSI 4500 continuously calculates the peak-to-peak value of each channel's waveform. When configured,
this value may be used as the overall level instead of the RMS value for Gross Scan
reporting purposes.
AMS Machinery Manager Database Server

The AMS Machinery Manager database server manages access to all AMS Machinery
Manager databases. The database server is a multi-threaded, client-server application that
runs on any supported Win32 platform.
RBM Database

The AMS Machinery Manager database is organized around Areas (logical groups of
Equipment) and Equipment (machines and other assets.) An AMS Machinery Manager
database provides storage for measurement point, trend, spectral, waveform, and notepad
data plus image files from infrared, ultrasonic, and online technologies.

Overview

1-9

Data Collection and Reporting


The data collection and reporting capabilities of the 4500 online system are unique in the
industry. This section presents an overview of how they operate. Although the techniques
used are typical of traditional DCS (Distributed Control System) and SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition) systems, they are not commonly found in the few
online vibration monitoring systems available.
The most interesting capability is eventbased triggering of adaptive data collection.
Although the sensors are permanently mounted on the equipment in a specific location, it
may be desirable to occasionally monitor the signal from that sensor differently in particular as speed of operation or load conditions change, or as equipment starts and stops
during a process.
For example, suppose you normally collect an 800 line spectrum at 800 Hz for routine analysis but you suspect that during runup the machine has a resonance between 900 RPM
and 1200 RPM. During that range of operation you may want to take a 3200 line spectrum
at 200 Hz, either in addition to or instead of the normal acquisition.
The 4500 unit provides support for this type of specialized acquisition automatically using
predicates. A predicate is a boolean ifthen expression which allows the arbitrary combination of AC and DC gross scan readings, speed inputs, and discrete relay inputs to define
the conditions when a particular collection should occur. The concept is very similar to
RLL code in a PLC that combines input comparators and relay states to perform controls.
A typical predicate would look like T1 >= 900 & T1 <= 1200 & D1 which is interpreted
as: when the speed reading on tachometer channel one is between 900 and 1200 RPM
inclusive, and the input relay on discrete channel one is energized, then trigger this collection.
Another predicate might be (GR1 > 1 | GD1 < -5 | GD1 > +5) & (D3 & !D5). A predicate
like this would be used to say When the pump is on and the valve is open, check to see if
the signal is out of the normal range; if it is, collect some data. The Online Config client
provides a graphic interface to help simplify creating predicates.
Once data have been collected, the values calculated are compared to any limit values that
have been specified. There are traditional band alarms that generate exceptions when the
value moves above or below certain threshold values. There is also a Gross Scan Rateof
Change alarm for detecting toorapid changes and an Epsilon trigger that is used to sample
changing values between band limits for visually smoother trends.

1-10

Read This First

Support for a hysteresis or dead band value is provided to help debounce signals that are
noisy and hovering around a threshold level. The hysteresis is applied only when the value
is moving out of an alarm condition into a lower band. This helps prevent excessive alarms
being generated and data being stored unnecessarily.
Transitions out of alarm are also treated as exceptions. This means that a positive notification of returntonormal is provided without depending on timebased reports to clear the
condition.
By linking data transmission and storage to exception conditions, the potential exists for
considerably lighter network loading than would otherwise occur. A properly configured
system should be virtually silent unless something of interest is detected. There is considerable ability to define what qualifies as interesting and fine tune data reporting and storage.
The system also provides the ability to associate exception conditions with relay closure.
Any limit value can be configured to energize an output relay if that condition occurs. You
can also control which exceptions cause data to be stored in the database. In short, very
finegrained capability is provided to control data traffic.
The ability to perform data collections on a timed interval, as well as the ability to report
data values on timed intervals, is also provided for situations where a more traditional vibration monitoring approach is preferred.

Data Collection and Reporting

1-11

Online Config Client

Online Config Diagram

The Online Config client application communicates with a running Online Server to interactively define the data collections and analyses to be performed by the available 4500
units. It performs a considerable amount of validation on the configured information to help
ensure it is valid and usable.
This program is where the equipment to be monitored is described, the physical characteristics of the sensors are defined, and the collections appropriate to the various operating conditions are created. It is also the place where these logical items are associated with
particular physical 4500 units. Using this information the Online Server can automatically
download the appropriate configuration when a 4500 unit starts up and requests its operating instructions.
Online Config is an integral part of the system commissioning process because it allows
remote validation of signals and requires positive acknowledgment of their correctness
before allowing a unit to be activated. There is also an offline mode for performing basic
configuration when a running system is not available, but ultimately the units must be commissioned before use. In order for that to happen the client must be connected to a running
server with active 4500 units. One simple reason for this requirement is to verify that the
unit actually contains the resources it needs to perform the configured collections.

1-12

Read This First

Only one configuration client may be connected to a particular server at any given time.
This helps prevent confusion where two or more clients try to set up different information
on the same equipment.
The configuration client can only be accessed from the AMS Machinery Manager Main
Menu. All program functions are controlled by security attributes which are set up on a per
user basis by the AMS Machinery Manager Administrator.

Database Objects Hierarchy


The 4500 Online software was designed so that its hierarchy of data objects roughly correspond to real-world objects. The following figure shows the relationships of the various
items managed by Online Config:

Object Hierarchy Diagram

Collection Criteria

AP Set - Defines a particular way to collect spectral data. The AP Set specifies the number
of lines of resolution; any averaging modes and windowing; whether to be order-based; and
what FMax to use, if appropriate.

Online Config Client

1-13

Analysis Parameter - Refers to a type of data that is collected for trending.


An Analysis Parameter (AP) Set is a set of analysis parameters that defines
what and how data is to be collected. For more information, please see
Analysis Parameter Sets on page C-1.
Note

The DCM II CPU has an additional acquisition FMAX setting of 40KHz.


Prior CPUs only supported up to 20KHz. An error message will be returned
should an FMAX of 40 KHz be selected when using a DCM I (non-transient) system (invalid FMAX).
AL Set - A collection of Alarm Limits. Each AL Set is associated with a specific AP Set.
There may be multiple AL Sets defined for any given AP Set to accommodate changing
monitoring conditions. For more information, please see Alarm Limit Sets on page C-11.
Alarm Limit - The definition of operating bands or set points to be applied
to a particular AP value. These limits define what exception messages are
sent, when spectral data is stored, and what conditions cause output relays
to be set.
Predicate - An arbitrary expression that combines comparators and relay states to recognize conditions to trigger data collection.
Predicates are used to adaptively select different collections or apply different alarm limits
according to current machine operating conditions. For complete information on Predicates, please see Appendix E of this manual.
Logical Hierarchy
For complete information on the Logical Hierarchy, please see The Logical Hierarchy on
page B-2.
Area - A user-defined grouping of equipment. An Area often corresponds to a building or
section of a process line within a plant. For more information, please see Area on page B-5.
Equipment - A group of coupled devices that logically should be monitored together.
Most often a machine train made up of a driver component (such as a motor) and one or
more driven components (such as a pump or fan). For more information please see Equipment on page B-6.

1-14

Read This First

Component - A specific, single asset to be monitored, possibly with multiple sensors.


Usually a driver or driven piece of machinery. Motors, engines, turbines, pumps, fans, etc.
are examples of components. For more information please see Component on page B-9.
Measurement Point - Corresponds to a single physical sensor. Groups together all the
data from all the collections that have been defined for a particular sensor.
Any Gross Scan data collected on the sensor and reported for storage is logically associated
with the Measurement Point in the database. For more information please see Measurement Point on page B-20.
Data Collection Sets (DCS) - The DCS is a grouping item that allows multiple collections to occur on a single Measurement Point. The DCS combines a particular predicate
(when to collect) with a particular AP Set (what and how to collect) and a specific AL Set
(limit bands and set points.)
For complete information on Data Collection Sets, please see Appendix D of this manual.
Physical Hierarchy

Units - Represents a physical CSI Model 4500 Online RBMconsultant monitoring unit.
Signal Channels - An AC vibration or DC process input; up to 32 per unit. Channels are
grouped together by type into cards that are plugged into the unit.
Tachometer Channels - A speed measurement input; up to 16 per Unit.
Digital I/O Channels - A discrete relay, input or output; up to 16 per unit.

Online Config Client

1-15

Online Watch Client

Online Watch Diagram

The Online Watch client application communicates with a running Online Server to display
current status information for the entire online system. It is typically run from the RBM
Main Menu but may be run in a stand-alone mode for observation purposes only.
This program provides a hierarchical tree view of the system and a detailed view for the currently selected item in the tree. Icons and color-coding are used to indicate problems and
current conditions. The lowest level detail views contain traditional faceplate graphs of the
collected values. The value is plotted against a scale that is related to the physical range of
the sensor, the alarm set points defined, or a hybrid mode that uses both to optimize the display.
The concept of customized views is supported by Working Folders, which allow you to
gather several items of particular interest into a single location for easier access. Multiple
working folders are allowed and the configurations are tracked by the AMS Machinery
Manager user id for userspecific recall whenever the program is started.
With appropriately assigned access rights you may:

1-16

Read This First

Display current live trends of signal values. These strip chartstyle displays update
continuously as new data are received from the remote units
Request arbitrary spectral acquisitions on AC signal channels. Any collection that
could be defined in the Online Config program, including specific AP features to
be extracted, may be collected ondemand
Change Alarm Limit set point configurations. This allows you to adjust the alarm
sensitivity of specific values if conditions warrant
Acknowledge alarm conditions
Manually initiate an extraction of transient data into a permanent archive saved in
the RBM database
You also have the ability to interact with an Alarm Log manager that tracks current and historical exception conditions. This log may be filtered and sorted in various ways to simplify
the process of isolating items of interest.
The interactive capacities are provided primarily to facilitate remote checking of a systems
current condition, typically to help analyst personnel decide if they need to come in and deal
with a detected situation.
A particularly interesting capability is the AutoAlert folder. This is basically a system
defined working folder with a special purpose: as new exception notifications are received,
the appropriate signal gauge is automatically placed into the folder sorted on time and
urgency. Acknowledging the alarm condition will remove the item from this special folder.
Items are also removed automatically when the alarm condition clears. In this way you
have a clear indication of new situations as they arise.

Online Watch Client

1-17

Online Server
If the Model 4500 units, the Online System client applications, and AMS Machinery Manager are considered an orchestra, then the Online Server would be the conductor. A more
technically precise definition is: The Online Server is a 32-bit computer program for Windows written in the C++ programming language using Microsofts Foundation Classes.
The Online Server is intended to run only on Microsoft Windows as a background server
process without a user interface (i.e., a service). For this application to execute properly,
TCP/IP networking support and version 2 of the WinSock library must be installed. Also,
the AMS Machinery Manager database manager process must be present and running at
all times.
The Online Server requires a multiprocessor host computer with considerable RAM
installed because it is a multithreaded application that supports an arbitrary number of clients, and it receives data from an arbitrary number of 4500 collection units. Storing most of
the data in an AMS Machinery Manager standardformat database, it buffers much of the
data for client trend displays, and distributes exception data to the Online Watch application.
Online Server provides the support for discoverybased validation and configuration of
newlyinstalled hardware. It interacts with the Online Config program to define, save, and
download configuration data for the 4500 and keep the active units synchronized. This
system keeps all active clients synchronized with changes made by any client to the system
hierarchy or to its monitoring and reporting activities.
The Online Server manages live data acquisition via ondemand collection, and provides
the routing capability to make sure the various user requests get to the correct units and the
results get back to the proper client. It provides the ability to run remote clients in parallel
with local clients. It manages distribution and acknowledgment of exceptional condition
messages among multiple clients and enforces any security constraints defined for limiting
client access or capability.
The Online Server is responsible for receiving, converting, and storing the data collected by
the 4500 units into the RBM database. It provides a level of buffering for data and events
in situations where the database is inaccessible either physically due to equipment
failure or logically because another program has obtained exclusive access to the database.
Basically if there is information produced, transported or displayed somewhere in the
system Online Server will eventually touch it, probably several times.

1-18

Read This First

Online Client Application Interaction


One very important aspect of this system is that it is online. Actions taken by one client can
impact other connected clients. When an Online Watch client acknowledges alarms, all
other connected Online Watch clients will see that same alarm become acknowledged in
their alarm log.
Demand acquisitions and live trend display requests are unique to each client. Two simultaneous acquisitions will occur slower than one, but each client will see only the data they
requested. Similarly each client can request trend windows without affecting, or being
affected by, other clients.
Perhaps the most noticeable interaction is when an Online Config client saves a database
through the Online Server. When this occurs, the server temporarily shuts down all communications to prevent possible database corruption. Because the entire structure may have
changed, all connected clients must reestablish their connection to the server and all active
4500 units will potentially be redownloaded with new configuration tables.

Online Client Application Interaction

1-19

1-20

Read This First

Chapter

Online Configuration

Introduction
The Online Config program is a client application that enables you to configure your online
system. You will use Online Config to setup databases and to configure your systems 4500
hardware units.
Online Config is used to configure the databases for Emersons CSI Model 4500 Series
Online RBMconsultant. This system provides event-driven data collection and exceptionbased reporting of data. Online Config is also used to define the equipment to be monitored
and to configure the 4500 hardware. In addition, Online Config is used to define the events
that cause data collection, the type of data to collect, and the exceptions that cause the
reporting of data.
This chapter presents a hypothetical situation in which Online Config will be used to configure a database and 4500 hardware units for an application example. Step-by-step instructions direct you through the complete process of using Online Config to setup a database
and configure the 4500 units.

2-1

Application Example
Company ABC is going to install the Model 4500 to monitor a motor-fan equipment train.

Example Motor-Fan Equipment Train

In this example, there are four measurement points. On the motor, there is one on the
inboard bearing (MI), and one on the outboard bearing, (MO). On the fan there is one on
the inboard bearing, (FI), and one on the outboard bearing, (FO). There will be a physical
tach at the fan, and a virtual ratio tach at the motor.
Given:
S1 = the speed of the motor
S2 = the speed of the fan
D1 = the diameter of the motor pulley
D2 = the diameter of the fan pulley
We know:
D1S1 = D2S2

2-2

Online Configuration

The Physical tach will measure S1, therefore


S2 = (D1 / D2)S1
Thus,
Ratio = (D1/D2)
An Emerson field service engineer may begin configuring the database prior to arriving at
the customers plant. The user only needs to have AMS Machinery Manager installed on
his/her computer with Online technologies and the necessary privileges. The privileges are
assigned by the AMS Machinery Manager administrator.

AMS Machinery Manager Main Menu

Launch Online Config by double-clicking its icon on the Setup/Communications tab of the
AMS Machinery Manager Main Menu. Online Config provides an offline mode so the
user can create a database without having access to the Online Server. This is accomplished
using a template database.

Application Example

2-3

Step 1 - Open a Database Template


Begin the database creation process by opening the example database template provided
by Emerson.
1. . . On the File menu, highlight Template Database, then on the popup menu, select
Open.

File - Template Database - Open

2. . . From the Open dialog box, select template.cvb and click the Open button.

File Open Dialog

2-4

Online Configuration

Step 2 - Configure the Hardware


Given the application described above, the 4500 unit being installed will initially have four
accelerometers, one physical tachometer, and one virtual tachometer.
For step-by-step instructions for configuring the hardware, please seeCreating and Configuring Hardware in Appendix A.

Step 3 - Create Predicates


After the hardware has been configured, you can create predicates based upon the defined
channels. Predicates are expressions that evaluate to true or false, and are used to define the
event for collecting data. For example, in this application we are interested in collecting data
at point MI when the physical tach indicates a speed between 1000 and 1200 RPM.
For step-by-step instructions on defining predicates, please see Predicates in Appendix E.
Note

A trip predicate cannot be created from a database template (.CVB file).

Application Example

2-5

Step 4 - Define the Equipment to be Monitored


After the hardware has been configured, the next step is to define the equipment to be monitored. The equipment being monitored is defined in terms of plant topology, which is presented in a hierarchical tree structure in Online Config. The Area, which is a logical
grouping for equipment trains, will be defined first. The user will then define the equipment
train, and components that comprise the equipment train.

Measurement points will be defined for each component followed by the assignment of
hardware channels to those measurement points.
For step-by-step instructions, please see Defining Equipment to be Monitored in
Appendix B.

2-6

Online Configuration

Step 5 - Connect to an Online Server


Hardware configuration, creation of predicates, creation of monitored equipment, and
assignment of measurement points to hardware channels can be done in the offline mode.
Once these have been completed, the next step is to go Online. This means connecting
Online Config to the Online Server.
1.. . .From the File menu, on the Online Server popup list, select Open.

Online Config - Open Online Server

2.. . .From the Browse for Server dialog box, select the desired server and click the OK
button.

Application Example

2-7

Browse for Server Dialog Box

Note

Only one Online Config client may be connected to the Online Server at any
one time.
In order to bring a template database Online, you should select a server that is running with
no database. Once connected, the server will announce the available 4500 units to Online
Config.
If an available 4500 unit has an ethernet address that matches a unit in the template database
and their card configurations are identical, then the predefined units status will indicate that
it is online. If the ethernet address was unknown when the 4500 unit was created, then the
user may choose a unit from the available units and merge it with the predefined unit. This
process will automatically update the ethernet address if the card configurations are identical.
Note

The ethernet address is also referred to as the MAC (Medium Access Control) as described by IEEE 802.
Once the units are online you are ready to commission the hardware.

2-8

Online Configuration

Step 6 - Commission the Hardware


Commissioning is the process of validating the signals being received from the hardware
channels. A channel must be commissioned before routine data collection can be performed.
When a channel is commissioned it is ready for routine data collection. For step-by-step
instructions on commissioning channels, please see Commissiong in Appendix F.

Step 7 - Define Data Collection Sets


Once the commissioning process is complete, you are ready to define the data collection
sets (DCSs) for each measurement point. In the application described above, there will be
two DCSs for each measurement point. The first will be a routine data collection that
acquires a fairly low resolution spectrum with collection based solely on speed. The second
will be used for more detailed analysis when the health of the component is in question.
Therefore, this collection will be based on speed and the gross scan value.
You will need to select the appropriate analysis parameter set, which will define the spectral
and waveform acquisitions and any parameters to be calculated, and the appropriate predicate for each DCS. In the commissioning process the user will be able to automatically
create an analysis parameter set, if needed, and an alarm limit set.
For creation of additional analysis parameter sets and associated alarm limit sets please see
Analysis Parameter and Alarm Limit Sets in Appendix C.
For step-by-step instructions on creating Data Collection Sets, please see Datta Collection
Sets in Appendix D.
Note

The CSI 4500 must be attached and turned on before you can activate a data
collection sets (DCS).

Application Example

2-9

Step 8 - Begin Routine Data Collection


After the data collection sets have been defined and activated, save the changes to the
Online Server. The Online Server will download the information to the 4500 unit. At this
point, routine data collection can begin.

Online Config - Online Server Save

2-10

Online Configuration

The server will notify the Online Config client that it is has received the database.

Server Has Received Database Message Box

Once the Online Server has saved the database, it will notify Online Config and drop the
connection. Online Config will then shut down. You will see the message box below. Click
OK to continue.

Saved Database / Reconnect Message

Any CSI 4500 affected by the changes will receive a new configuration. While this occurs,
the units will display a status of acknowledge in Online Watch.
At this point the Online System is collecting data, and Online Watch clients can connect to
see the live status of the system. For a complete explanation of the Online Watch application, please see Online Watch on page 3-1.

Application Example

2-11

Step 9 - Define Trip Predicates


To create a radial trip predicate:

Expand the tree under the CSI 4500 to show the Predicates folder
Right-click on the Predicates folder.
Choose Add Radial Trip Predicate from the three options that appear in the popup
menu.

Radial Trip Predicate View

1. . . Name the predicate. Select a name that will helps describe the device. For example,
Turbine 1 for the first turbine in a list of turbines to be measured.
2. . . Select the number of sensors per bearing that will be used. The most common
selection is two. This is two sensors per bearing, not two sensors total.

2-12

Online Configuration

3 . . .Select the number of bearings. Select one bearing if you have only one primary
bearing and no adjacent bearings. Select two bearings if you have one primary
bearing and one adjacent bearing. For example, two bearings on a shaft. Select three
bearings if you have one primary bearing and two adjacent bearings. In the example
above only one bearing has been selected.
4 . . .Select the Output Relay. This is a drop down menu. You will select an output relay
based up which channels you have set up as output.
5 . . .Trip Time Delay. Select whole numbers between 0 and 10 seconds. This delay
allows the CSI 4500 to monitor the event tripping the predicate to make sure it is a
continuous event before notifying you.
6 . . .Trip on ALL Bad Sensors on the Primary Bearing. If checked, this means you will
be alerted if the CSI 4500 detects that all the sensors monitoring a bearing are not
functioning. If not selected, the CSI 4500 will alert you when even one sensor is not
functioning normally.
For more information on radial trip predicates, see Predicates in Appendix E.

Step 10 - Transient Channel Commissioning


Once the database points are defined, the online signal channel(s) and the tachometer
channel(s) are first commissioned for normal online usage. To begin the transient channel
commissioning, right-click on the CSI 4500 (under 4500 Units) and select Commission
Transient Channels.

The transient tachometer is selected in the next window (the transient tachometer is limited
to channels 13, 14, 15 or 16) and the Number of Revolutions field is set up to provide a
choice of the number of machine revolutions.

Application Example

2-13

These are defined for the purpose of display during transient commissioning.
At the component, select/associate signal channels and the tachometer that are to be used to
produce transient data.
The component and associated transient channels must be associated with the transient
tachometer.
The communication process is on a per tachometer basis with the association of signal
channels common to the component.
If the equipment is not running, transient commissioning can be performed by clearing the
Read Current RPM field.
The channels to be commissioned are then checked as desired. Once this is completed,
click acquire to collect data on the channels.

Once done, click Close to exit this screen.

2-14

Online Configuration

Illustrated below is a typical proximity probe waveform associated with Tachometer communication.

Application Example

2-15

The illustration below depicts the transient commissioned channels.

Once the data has been acquired, a screen displays that allows scrolling through the data
collected on each channel that was selected.
Two channels of data are illustrated on the screen, and the other channels can be viewed by
scrolling.
Select commission after reviewing the data and the channels will be commissioned for transient data acquisition.
Close the window when the task is complete. For more tachometers, simply repeat the process.
Once transient channels have been commissioned, icons indicating this on both the component properties page and on the CSI 4500 faceplate page display.

2-16

Online Configuration

Transient setup is complete at this point.

Step 11 - Define Auto-Archive Predicates


Transient systems, once configured, are streaming continuous time waveform, overalls and
tachometer pulse records to the configured hard drive location. When the hard drive fills up,
the oldest data is overwritten with new data.
An analyst must extract or read the data from the hard drive and save it to a permanent
archive in the RBM database for detailed analysis. The online system allows users to predefine an event via a predicate that will cause data to automatically be extracted from the
hard drive and saved in a permanent archive. The mechanism for doing this is to define an
auto-archive predicate. This allows the analyst to capture a bump in the night event automatically.
Right click on a transient commissioned tachometer and select Transient Auto-Archive
Properties .

Application Example

2-17

The following screen appears.

Auto-archives use a standard collection predicate, as defined in Step 3, to determine when


an event of interest has occurred. The name the auto archive will be saved under is a combination of the name entered on this screen along with the date and time of the extraction.
Set both pre-trigger and post-trigger time in a manner similar to the AP and Block data
backup timer values. They identify the amount of data to extract before and after the trigger
event. The combined time of the two added together cannot be greater than 60 minutes. The
actual data extracted will from time predicate went true - pre-trigger time through time
predicate went true + post-trigger time.
Only those transient signal channels that are associated with the triggering transient
tachometer are extracted. The tachometer and signal channel associations are defined via
the online measurement point configurations. An archive will be created for each component associated with the triggering transient tachometer channel. The RBM database
archive file(s) will be created in the archive directory specified in the Diagnostic Analysis
Specify Archive Directory field.

2-18

Online Configuration

To understand these parameters consider the following scenario. An auto-archive predicate


fires at time T. At this point, transient data for signal channels associated with the transient
tachometer and beginning at T - pre-trigger time and ending at T + post-trigger time is
extracted from the 4500 and archived. Once archived, it will be available from the hierarchy
of the Diagnostic Analysis application.

Illustration of a triggering transient event

Application Example

2-19

2-20

Online Configuration

Chapter

Online Watch

Introduction
Online Watch can be either integrated or a client application that is used to monitor your
online system. Online Watch uses graphs, icons, and a color-coding system to graphically
represent the live status of your online system.
Online Watch can also be used to acknowledge alarms, modify existing alarm limits, and
request demand acquisitions of data, depending on the permissions granted by your AMS
Machinery Manager system administrator.
This chapter consists of two sections. The first section is a general Users Guide that
explains the key concepts associated with Online Watch and how they are implemented.
The second section is a Reference section that explains the specific functions of each
screen.
Note

The Online Watch display refresh rate defaults to three (3) seconds. It is,
however, user configurable. In order to specify a refresh rate other than the
default, an entry must be made to the Display Options section of the Online
Watch.ini file on a per user basis. The entry must read RefreshRate=time
where the time specified is in milliseconds (1000, 3000, 5000, etc). If no
refresh rate is specified, the refresh rate will be the three second default. The
refresh rate specified cannot be less than one second or greater than thirty
seconds. If the specified rate is less than one second, the refresh rate will be
set to one second. If the specified rate is greater than thirty seconds, the
refresh rate will be set to thirty seconds. Refresh rates must be in whole seconds, i.e. 1 second, 2 seconds, 20 seconds, etc.

3-1

Users Guide Section


This section provides conceptual information regarding the function of the Online Watch
program.
For information on the function of a specific field or screen, please see Reference Section
on page 3-42.

3-2

Online Watch

Executing Online Watch


Online Watch can be installed and executed either as a standalone program or integrated
with AMS Machinery Manager.
When integrated with AMS Suite: Machinery Health Manager, Online Watch must be
launched from the Tools tab of the main application window. By default, Online Watch is
located on the page associated with the Analysis menu option on the Tools tab. To launch
the application, double-click the Online Watch icon.

AMS Machinery Manager Main Menu - Launching Online Watch

If Online Watch is running as a stand-alone program, it is launched like any other Microsoft
Windows application (i.e., from the Start menu or the desktop.)

Executing Online Watch

3-3

Connecting to an Online Server [Ctrl+N, Alt-F-C]


Online Watch displays the live status of the online system. Therefore, unlike Online Config,
the application does not have an offline mode.
The first time you launch Online Watch, you must select an Online Server to which to connect. On the File menu, select Connect and navigate to the desired server computer.
Note

Online Server must be running on the selected server computer.


After the initial connection, Online Watch will by default attempt to connect to the most
recently used Online Server. This behavior can be modified by accessing the General Tab
in the Options dialog box. For more information, please see Options Dialog Box [Alt-TO] on page 3-58.

3-4

Online Watch

Navigating the Hierarchical Database View


Once a connection to an Online Server is established, the database hierarchy is displayed in
the left pane of the main application window. The left pane is referred to as the tree view.
To view the status of a given item in the tree view, click on its icon. When a given item contains one or more subitems, a + will appear to the left of the item in the tree view. Clicking
on the + will expand the item allowing you to view its sub-items; the + will be changed to
a . To collapse an expanded item, click the next to it; the will be changed back to a +.
Expanding and collapsing items may also be accomplished by double-clicking a given
item or by selecting the item and then pressing the + or keys on the numeric keypad.
The tree view is organized into three top-level folders: Areas, Units, and Working Folders.
The Areas folder contains the plant topology from the database such as Areas, Equipment,
Components, and Measuring Points. The Units folder contains the monitoring topology
such as units and channels. Working folders allow you to organize and view the status of
various items together regardless of their location in the database hierarchy.

Hierarchical Database (Tree) View

Navigating the Hierarchical Database View

3-5

Monitoring System Status


How System Status is Displayed
The status of the online system is determined by the type (severity) and urgency (relative
importance) of the alarms occurring in the system. The type and urgency of alarms is conveyed by the use of color-coding and icons.
The status of a given item in the database hierarchy is determined by the items alarm state
as well as the alarm state of all of its sub-items. For example, assume a given component
has three measurement points M1H, M1V, and M1A. Point M1H has no alarms (Normal
urgency.) The gross scan AC reading for point M1V is High alarm (Urgent urgency.) One
of the analysis parameters for one of the data collection sets for Point M1A is in HighHigh
alarm (Critical urgency.) In this scenario, the composite state of the component is HighHigh
(Critical urgency) because that is the worst state of the component and all of its sub-items.
In turn, the composite state of this component contributes to the composite state of the
equipment, area, and database to which it belongs.
Therefore, if the tree view indicates an alarm condition, you should expand the items indicating the condition to the lowest level possible. In most cases, the actual alarm will be on
a gross scan AC or DC reading or on an analysis parameter.

Viewing Current Status and Data Values


What is displayed in the right pane of the main application window is determined by the
item selected in the left pane (tree view.) This section will discuss the various views displayed in the right pane.
Plant Topology View

The Plant Topology View contains a list of all the areas in the database. This list displays
the identifier, description, composite alarm urgency, and composite last report for each area.

3-6

Online Watch

This view also contains an equipment list. When one or more areas are selected in the area
list, the equipment for each of the selected areas is displayed in the equipment list. This list
displays the identifier, composite alarm urgency, composite last report, speed for each
equipment item.

Plant Topology View

Area View

The Area View contains the status information for the selected area as well as a list of all of
the equipment in the area. The Equipment List displays the identifier, composite alarm
urgency, composite last report, and speed for each equipment item.

Monitoring System Status

3-7

This view also contains a Components List. When one or more equipment items are
selected in the Equipment List, the components for each of the selected equipment items
are displayed in the Components List. This list displays the identifier, composite alarm
urgency, composite last report, and speed for each component.

Area View

3-8

Online Watch

Equipment View

The Equipment View contains the status information for the selected equipment item as
well as a list of all of the components for the equipment. The Components List displays the
identifier, composite alarm urgency, composite last report, and speed for each component.
This view also contains a Measurement Points list. When one or more components are
selected in the Components List, the measurement points for each of the selected components are displayed in the Measurement Points List. This list displays the identifier, composite alarm urgency, composite last report, speed, gross scan AC reading, and gross scan
DC reading for each measurement point.

Equipment View

Monitoring System Status

3-9

Component View

The Component View contains the status information for the selected component as well
as two lists of all of the measurement points for the component. The two lists are displayed
on separate tabs. The Measurement Points - Table tab displays the identifier, description,
speed, last report date/time and value for both gross scan AC and gross scan DC readings,
and a signal gauge for each measurement point. The Measurement Points - Face Plate tab
displays the identifier and a vertically oriented signal gauge for each measurement point.

Component View

3-10

Online Watch

Measurement Point View

The Measurement Point View contains the status information for the selected measurement
points as well as a list of all of the data collection sets defined for the measurement point.
The Data Collection Sets List displays the identifier, composite urgency, composite last
report, speed, and predicate state for each data collection set. When one or more data collection sets are selected in the Data Collection Sets List, the analysis parameters for each of
the selected data collection sets is displayed in two Analysis Parameter Lists that are displayed on separate tabs.
The Analysis Parameters - Table tab displays the number, last report date/time, value, and
a signal gauge for each analysis parameter. The Analysis Parameters - Face Plate tab displays the number and a vertically oriented signal gauge for each analysis parameter.

Measurement Point View

Monitoring System Status

3-11

Unit View

The Unit View contains the identification and status information for the selected unit.

Unit View

Status

What it means

Node (Unit) Up

normal operation

Node (Unit) Down

server not communicating with CSI 4500

Acknowledge

appears immediately after database change is


made or when the CSI 4500 is booting up.

If the selected unit is a transient unit, then there will be additional information displayed.
Please refer to Transient Unit View.

3-12

Online Watch

Signal (SIG) Channels View

The Signal (SIG - formerly Mux) Channels View displays the status for a list of all the
signal channels defined on a given unit. The Signal (SIG) Channels List displays the
channel number, description, alarm urgency, alarm type, last report, and values for gross
scan AC and gross scan DC readings for each signal channel.

Signal (SIG) Channels View

Tachometer Channels View

The Tachometer Channels View displays the status for a list of all the tachometer channels
defined on a given unit. The Tachometer Channels List displays the channel number,
description, alarm urgency, last report, and measured speed for each tachometer channel.

Tachometer Channels View

Monitoring System Status

3-13

Digital I/O Channels View

The Digital I/O Channels View displays a list of all the digital I/O channels defined on a
given unit along with their composite status. The Digital I/O Channels List displays the
channel number, description, alarm urgency, last report, and value for each digital I/O
channel.

Digital I/O Channels View

Disable/Enable Output Relays: You can enable and disable digital output relays. This
feature is designed to let you turn off (disable) relays that are turned on by the alarm or trip
relay enunciation. Disabled output relays are not enunciated again until they are enabled.
When an output relay is enabled, normal operation is restored.
Relay status displays in the Digital I/O Channel list for input and output relays. The list
updates to reflect the type (input/output), and its de-energized state (normally open/closed).
Also, an icon displays for disabled relays. To disable/enable a relay, select the relay in the
list, right click it, and search the desired operation. Disable/enable is not available for input
relays.
Disable a Relay:

All relays are active in this screen.

3-14

Online Watch

Right-click on an output relay. The Disable Relay pop-up menu appears. Click on the menu
to disable the relay.

Click the Disable Relay pop-up menu to disable the relay.

The disabled relay is no longer highlighted, the disabled icon appears, and the relay reads
Output Disabled.

Relay #02 reads Output Disabled and the disabled icon appears.

Enable a Relay:
To enable the relay, right-click on the disabled relay. The Enable Relay pop-up menu
appears. Click on the menu to enable the relay.

Click the Enable Relay pop-up menu to enable the relay.

Monitoring System Status

3-15

Transient Status Tab

Disabling/Enabling Archive Predicates

Right click on the Tach Predicate and select Disable Archive Predicate or Enable
Archive Predicate.
The purpose of this option is to allow the user to temporarily disable a predicate that has
become true and has activated auto archives. If the user wants to make a change to the database, there needs to be a way to disable the predicate temporarily so that a change can be
made via Online Config.
Disable Archive Predicate will disable the predicate temporarily. If there are any pending
archives then the user is given the option to cancel all pending archives. The Predicate will
be re-enabled automatically if the user stops and restarts online server or serializes a change
to the database via Online Config.
Caution!

If an external hard drive has been connected and selected as the Active
Streaming Location (Fail-over), the Current Acquisition State should
never have a value of unknown. If it says unknown, it may indicate an
external hard drive failure.

3-16

Online Watch

Enable Archive Predicate allows the user to re-enable the predicate and proceed with generating auto archives.

Caution!

Make sure the predicate is re-enabled if it is disabled.

Monitoring System Status

3-17

Stop/Start Transient Acquisition

O_Watch - Right click on the Unit and select Stop and Start Transient Acquisition.
Stop Transient Acquisition means that the transient data will not be streaming to the 4500
Transient hard drive. If transient acquisition has been stopped, then the data will not be
available to be extracted later in the Diagnostic Analysis Application. The default for a
system when Oserver is started is to start transient acquisition.
Transient Status Tab

The Transient Status tab includes the current transient acquisition state (collecting,
unknown, or stopped) and active streaming location (primary or fail-over). In addition, the
current transient tachometer speeds and a timestamp of the oldest available transient data
will be displayed. This timestamp is useful in predicting when transient data may be overwritten.
The Storage Location Configuration fields display the locations and sizes of the primary
and fail-over drives as configured in Online Config. The Retry Primary button allows a user
to initiate an attempt to retry streaming to the primary configured location. This button will
be active only if an external path was defined as the primary streaming location, but it has
failed (i.e.: The Active Streaming Location is the CSI 4500s internal hard drive).

3-18

Online Watch

Transient Unit View

If the selected unit is a transient unit, then in addition to the standard unit view information,
the view will contain two addition tabs. These additional tabs include information concerning the CSI 4500 units transient streaming and archiving state.
Measurements are stored to the hard drive until the storage capactity is full, then the earliest
measurements are overwritten. This is sometimes refered to as FIFO, First In, First Out.
Achiving, whether automatic or manual saves off part of the measurments so that they will
not be overwritten by the FIFO process. For example, an automatic achieve is created by a
trip event, data from before the trip event and after the trip event is stored with a unique
name and date and time stamp. These keep it from being overwritten. Up to an hours worth
of data can be stored per automatic trip event.

Transient Unit

Transient Archive Status Tab

This tab displays information concerning any manual or automatic archives that were initiated by the online server. The Archive Type indicates whether the archive was initiated
automatically due to a pre-configured predicate trip or manually by an Online Watch user.
The Transient Archive Status has four states: Pending, Archiving, Completed or Truncated

Monitoring System Status

3-19

Pending - This is the status of an archive that is waiting to be processed. Additional information is being collected after an event has been triggered. Only one archive can be processed at a time by the online server. Therefore, any archives that are in the queue will be
flagged as pending.
Archiving - This is the status of an archive while it is actually in progress. The percentage
will be increasing as it being transferred to the server.
Completed - This is the status of the archive after it has become 100% complete. Completed archives will remain in the list until acknowledged by a user.

Archive status

Note

Archives remain in list until manually acknowledged.

3-20

Online Watch

When an Alarm Occurs


Online Watch alerts you to new alarms using a variety of methods. If the alarm causes the
composite alarm state to change, the color of the corresponding items in the tree will change
color to indicate the new state. Regardless of the alarm state, some or all of the following
information contained in the various views for the items corresponding to a new alarm will
be updated: alarm urgency, alarm type, last report date/time, and current measured value.
Immediate notification of a new alarm is provided by the alarm icon in the lower right-hand
corner of the Online Watch screen. When a new alarm is reported, this icon will flash.
Double-click on the icon to display the Auto-Alert Working folder. You can also proceed
to the Auto-Alert Working folder by:
clicking on its button on the toolbar
selecting Auto-Alert Working Folder from the View menu
pressing Ctrl+A
The alarm icon will continue to flash until you have viewed the new alarm by accessing the
Auto-Alert Working folder using one of the methods described above.
Another way to watch for new alarms is to select the Auto-Alert Working Folder in the tree
view. All items with an alarm urgency or alarm type other than Normal are automatically
added to this folder in reverse chronological order based on last report date/time.
The final way to watch for new alarms is to display the Alarm Log by selecting the Alarm
Log item from the View menu, clicking its button on the toolbar, or pressing Ctrl+L.

Monitoring System Status

3-21

Using the Alarm Log


What is the Alarm Log?

The Alarm Log is a tabular listing of alarms reported by the Online Server. Each alarm in
the log has the following attributes:
Urgency - Return-to-normal, Request, Report, Notify, Urgent, or Critical
Acknowledgment Status - Whether or not the alarm is acknowledged
Unit - Text description of the 4500 that reported the alarm
Source - Gross Scan, Tachometer, Digital I/O, DSP, or System
Description - A textual description of the alarm
Type - Normal, Low Low, High, Rate-of-Change, etc.
Value - The value of the alarm
Time Stamp - The date and time the alarm was generated

Purpose of the Alarm Log


The function of the alarm log is to show the current state of exceptions reported by the 4500
units to the Online Server. Additionally, it is useful to see the historical progression of an
alarm with respect to its current state. Therefore, the alarm log will also display the alarms
leading up to the current alarm condition. Under certain circumstances, large numbers of
alarms are generated as items transition quickly from one to state to another.
In order to prevent redundant alarms from cluttering the alarm log, alarm progressions (e.g.,
High to HighHigh) are collapsed into a single entry. An exception to this general rule is that
the worst alarm state is always maintained until acknowledged by the user.
For example, assume that the gross scan AC reading for a given measurement point leaves
the Normal state and goes into High alarm. An entry is added to the alarm log. Subsequently, the reading goes into HighHigh alarm. The existing entry in the alarm log is modified with the new alarm state. The reading then returns to High alarm. A new entry is added
to the alarm log in order to preserve the worst alarm state (HighHigh).

3-22

Online Watch

Alarm Count and Display Check Boxes


The number of alarms is listed at the top of the log by urgency. There is also a field that displays the total number of alarms. Selecting the check boxes enables you to filter the display
of alarms by urgency. However, it has no effect on alarm counts.

Alarm Manager - Alarm Count and Display Checkboxes

Column Headers
The header area of the list displays a description for each attribute of alarm data. The width
of each column may be adjusted by dragging the appropriate column header to the desired
size.

Alarm Manager - Resizing Columns

Monitoring System Status

3-23

In addition to column resizing, you can change a columns order within the list by dragging
its header to the desired position.

Alarm Manager - Reordering Columns

Alarm List
The list is organized into rows and columns of data. Each row in the list represents a single
alarm. The alarm attributes make up the columns in the list. A number of operations are
allowed on the listed alarms.

3-24

Online Watch

Context Menu

A context menu is available for controlling certain aspects of the alarm log as well as performing operations. To access the context menu, position the cursor over the alarm log and
click the right mouse button.

Alarm Manager - Context Menu

Actions

Acknowledge - Select this option to acknowledge one or more alarms. You must select
an alarm to acknowledge it. Click to select alarms, or while pressing the Ctrl key, click to
select multiple alarms. A range of alarms may be selected by clicking while pressing the
Shift key. After alarms are selected, invoke the context menu and select Acknowledge.
Note

When an Online Watch client acknowledges alarms, all other connected


Online Watch clients will see that same alarm become acknowledged in
their alarm log.
Find Associated Item - Select this option to change focus to the measurement point for
which the selected alarm was reported. Select an alarm, invoke the context menu, and select
find Associated Item. The appropriate item in the tree will be expanded and displayed.

Monitoring System Status

3-25

Filter - A large number of alarms can be difficult to manage. Alarm filtering is used to
narrow the focus to a more manageable subset of alarms. This allows the user to concentrate on only those alarms that are of most interest. As mentioned earlier, alarms may be filtered on urgency by selecting the desired urgency at the top of the Alarm Manager screen.
Another mechanism for filtering alarms is provided through a tabbed dialog accessed from
the context menu.
Alarm Source Tab

The options on this tab allow the user to display alarms based on the alarms source.

Advanced Filtering - Alarm Source Tab

Alarm Type Tab

The options on this tab allow the user to display alarms based on the type of alarm.

Advanced Filtering - Alarm Type Tab

3-26

Online Watch

Alarm Time Tab

The options on this tab allow the user to display alarms whose date / time occur after,
before, or within a range of date/times.

Advanced Filtering - Alarm Time Tab

Monitoring System Status

3-27

Modifying Alarm Limits


Maintaining accurate alarm limits is essential to the success of an online monitoring system.
If the limits are too constrained, many readings may continuously stay in alarm causing the
user to become desensitized to new alarms being reported. However, if the limits are too
loose, significant changes to current values may not be noticed or reported at all. For new
systems, it is generally advisable to create loose limits at first and tighten them once normal
operating ranges are established.
There are two types of alarm limits: channel alarm limits and analysis parameter set alarm
limits. Users who have been granted the appropriate permission by the AMS Machinery
Manager administrator may use Online Watch to modify both types of alarms. To do so,
you must select a gross scan AC, gross scan DC, or analysis parameter signal gauge and
subsequently select Edit Alarm Limits from the Tools menu. Alternately, you can rightclick on the alarm bar in a given signal gauge and select Edit Alarm Limits.

Alarm Limit Dialog Box

3-28

Online Watch

Only the limits that have been defined in Online Config are available for modification in
Online Watch. In other words, Online Watch cannot create limits, it can only modify preexisting ones. To modify an alarm limit, select one or more items in the list and right-click.
For more information about editing alarm limits, please see Appendix C Analysis Parameter and Alarm Limit Sets.
Alarm Limit Editor

Once all desired modifications are made, the user may click Apply to accept the changes or
Cancel to abort them. When the Apply button is clicked, a message is sent to the Online
Server requesting that the alarm limits be changed. Online Server sends the changes to the
appropriate 4500 unit. Once the 4500 unit accepts the changes and the database has been
updated, the Online Server notifies all connected clients of the change.
When modifications are made to AC/DC Gross Scan alarm limits, the alarm limit set up
for the channel is overwritten in the AMS Machinery Manager database. However, this is
not the case for analysis parameter alarm limits. All analysis parameters are part of an analysis parameter (AP) set. Each AP set may have one or more alarm limit (AL) sets associated with it. The AP sets and AL sets may be referenced by multiple data collection sets
across the entire database. Because of this, it is necessary to allow the user to modify the
alarm limits for a given analysis parameter in a given data collection set without modifying
the alarm limits defined in the AL set. Otherwise, an alarm limit change for a particular item
would affect all items that reference the AL set to which the alarm limit belongs. Therefore,
all analysis parameter alarm limit changes made by Online Watch are stored locally to a
given data collection set as a custom AL set.
Consequently, Online Watch is a great place to make temporary alarm limit changes. However, Online Config should be used to make permanent or sweeping alarm limit changes
by modifying the alarm limit sets themselves. The user may use Online Config to remove
custom AL sets. In doing so, the previous alarm limits are restored.

Converting a Custom AL Set to a Standard AL Set


Alarm Limit Sets are normally shared among Data Collection Sets. When you edit a limit
value for any particular Analysis Parameter associated with a DCS, a copy of the original
AL Set is made and this becomes a Custom AL Set specific to that DCS.

Modifying Alarm Limits

3-29

In Online Config you have the ability to revert back to the shared AL Set from the DCS
setup screen and discard your changes. You also have the option to convert the Custom AL
Set to a normal shared AL Set which is then available to any DCS that is using the same
associated AP Set.
To convert a Custom AL Set run the Online Configuration program. Expand the tree view
until you find the correct DCS it will have an AL Set attached underneath it in the tree.
Right click on the icon for the AL Set in the tree and a menu will appear. Select the option
to Convert AL-Set.
This will create a new AL Set in the tree under the appropriate AP Set, remove the Custom
AL Set from the DCS, and set the DCS to reference the new Standard AL Set.

3-30

Online Watch

Making Alarm Limit Changes to a CSI 4500 .RBM database


These instructions let you make alarm limit changes to the current 4500 *.RBM database
alarm sets and then resume data collection in the existing database. The instructions
assume that the online system is currently in operation.
Note

Modify alarm limits from Online Watch by right clicking on the alarm bar
above an analysis parameter, or by right clicking on the gross scan bar, and
selecting edit. A customized alarm set is created for the modified point
when alarms are modified in Online Watch. This procedure describes the
process of adjusting Global Alarm Sets.
1. Open Online Configuration and Connect to the Server

Open Online Configuration. Connect to the server (FILE / ONLINE SERVER / OPEN or
FILE / (recent server). This opens the current .RBM database.
2. Expand the Tree to find the Alarm Limit Set(s)

Expand the tree to see the ANALYSIS PARAMETERS folder. Then expand again to see
the individual analysis parameter sets. Expand the AP set you want so that it shows the
associated ALARM LIMIT set(s). Click on the AL set that you want to change, and make
the desired changes.
3. Save Changes to the .CVB File

After making the AL set changes, save a copy of the most recent changes to the .CVB file
by choosing FILE / TEMPLATE database / SAVE AS. It is crucial that you use the SAVE
AS function, so that you don't automatically save to the .RBM file. Select the current .CVB
file from the file list. Click SAVE. When prompted that the file name already exists, click
on YES to replace it.
Note

We recommend that you store a master copy of the .CVB file in a safe place,
other than the CUSTDATA folder.

Modifying Alarm Limits

3-31

4. Save Changes to the .RBM File

To save the changes to the .RBM file and begin collecting data with the database changes,
choose FILE / ONLINE SERVER / SAVE. A message appears that indicates the file has
been saved and Online Config is shutting down.
5. Open Online Watch and Begin Evaluating Changes

Open Online Watch, then connect to the server (or recent server) and begin evaluating the
results of the database changes.

3-32

Online Watch

Requesting Demand Acquisitions


Users who have been granted the appropriate permission by the AMS Machinery Manager
administrator may use Online Watch to request acquisitions of spectral and waveform data
on demand. To do so, the user must select a gross scan AC, gross scan DC, analysis parameter signal gauge, or tachometer and subsequently select Demand Acquisition from the
Tools menu. Alternately, the user may right-click on a signal gauge and select Demand
Acquisition.
For more information about setting up and requesting demand acquisitions of data, please
see Demand Acquisition Dialog Box [Alt-T-D] on page 3-53.

Roll Profile
The Roll Profile option captures a new, current spectrum and waveform, as well as plots the
waveform in a circular plot. This is not stored data from a database. Once the spectrum and
waveform are collected, they cannot be stored. Access the popup menu for this feature by
right-clicking on a Measurement Point Gross Scan channel or Analysis parameter.

Roll Profile Popup Menu.

Requesting Demand Acquisitions

3-33

This plot is based on a counter clockwise rotation. The Waveform minimum and maximum values are labeled per revolution, and each revolution can be viewed by moving the
slider on the slide bar at the bottom of the plot.

Roll Profile plots the waveform in a circular plot. This plot shows a counter-clockwise rotation.

The standard spectrum and waveform plots are also shown in conjunction with a Roll Profile Acquisition. Typically, this is used on a TSA (Time Synchronous Averaged) waveform
to diagnose potential Roll Cover Defects.

3-34

Online Watch

Requesting Live Trends


Users who have been granted the appropriate permission by the AMS Machinery Manager
administrator may use Online Watch to view a live trend of a given gross scan AC, gross
scan DC, tachometer or analysis parameter value. To do so, the user must select a gross scan
AC, gross scan DC, analysis parameter signal gauge, or tachometer and subsequently select
Live Trend from the Tools menu. Alternately, the user may right-click on a signal gauge
and select Live Trend.
For more information about live trends, please see Live Trend Window [Alt-T-L] on
page 3-52.

Requesting Live Trends

3-35

Managing a Transient System


A transient unit offers additional capabilities. With those capabilities comes the responsibility to monitor and manage the potentially massive amounts of data that are being collected. The online system allows users to choose which channels are configured to store
transient data. Users do this through the process of transient commissioning. Once channels
are commissioned for transient, the CSI 4500T unit is writing continuous time waveform
acquisitions to the configured hard drive location. All collected time waveform data, along
with overall level data and up to 4 tachometer pulse records are stored continuously for the
configured channels.
Data written to the configured hard drive location will be available for extraction and further analysis until such time as it is overwritten. Once the hard drive fills up, the oldest data
is overwritten by more recent data. The amount of data available at any one time depends
on the number of channels configured for transient and the size of the hard drive.
Any transient data that an analyst wishes to keep long term must be extracted or read from
the hard drive and saved to a permanent archive in the RBM database. There are three different mechanisms provided to accomplish that task.
The Diagnostic Analysis application may be used by analysts to view the Gross Scan and
RPM trend data directly from the CSI 4500Ts hard drive. This enables the analyst to make
an informed decision as to what portion of the transient event data needs further analysis.
Once determined, the data may be extracted from the hard drive and saved in a permanent
archive for further analysis at a later time. This is the best mechanism available since users
can choose just the small time window that is interesting.
In addition to the interactive method of extracting data provided by the Diagnostic Analysis
application, the online software provides manual and automated mechanisms for extracting
a time slice of transient data for later analysis. Those are provided through the manual
archive option provided by online watch and the auto-archiving predicate configuration
available via online config.
Manually Create a Transient Archive

Users who have been granted the appropriate permission by the AMS Machinery Manager
administrator may use Online Watch to view a live trend of a given gross scan AC, gross
scan DC, tachometer or analysis parameter value.
Performing a Demand Acquisition has requires the appropriate policy (permission). A user
will also need a Demand Acquisition in order to create a Transcient Archive.

3-36

Online Watch

Note

A manual archieve will not copy data already on the hard drive, may be
longer than one hour, and will not have an automatic date and time stamp.
Since it will have not automatic date and time stamp, it is necessary to give
each manual archieve a unique and clear name so it wont be overwritten by
a later manual archieve.
Enable or Disable Archive Predicate

The Transient Status tab on the unit view displays the current state of any configured
auto-archiving predicates. Users have available in this view a right click context menu that
allows them to disable or enable those predicates. Right click on the Tach Predicate and
select the Disable Archive Predicate or Enable Archive Predicate.

Managing a Transient System

3-37

Transient Status Tab

Disabling/Enabling Archive Predicates

Right click on the Tach Predicate and select Disable Archive Predicate or Enable
Archive Predicate.
The purpose of this option is to allow the user to temporarily disable a predicate that has
become true and has activated auto archives. If the user wants to make a change to the database, there needs to be a way to disable the predicate temporarily so that a change can be
made via Online Config.
Disable Archive Predicate will disable the predicate temporarily. If there are any pending
archives then the user is given the option to cancel all pending archives. The Predicate will
be re-enabled automatically if the user stops and restarts online server or serializes a change
to the database via Online Config.

3-38

Online Watch

Enable Archive Predicate allows the user to re-enable the predicate and proceed with generating auto archives.

Start or Stop Transient Acquisition

Users may wish to temporarily stop transient acquisitions. They may choose to do this in
order to prevent a transient event of interest from being overwritten or because the unit
being monitored is shutdown for maintenance. A user must have the ability to re-start transient acquisition as well. This capability is available by a right click on the Unit in the tree
view and select Stop Transient Acquisition or Start Transient Acquisition.
Stop Transient Acquisition means that the transient data will not be streaming to the configured hard drive. If transient acquisition has been stopped, then the data will not be available
to be extracted later.

Managing a Transient System

3-39

Installing the Standalone Online Watch Client


The Extras folder that is on the AMS Suite: Machinery Health Manager CD (or the Extras
folder in the root of the RBMNET share for Network Installations) contains a Online
Watch install that can be installed on workstations that do not have AMS Machinery Health
Manager installed. This installation allows for much of the same functionality as the Online
Watch program that is installed as part of AMS Machinery Health Manager.
To install the Standalone Online Watch Client go to the o_watch folder contained on the
Extras CD and run the SETUP.EXE, follow the prompts.
Differences in the Online Watch installations
The Online Watch installation that is in the extras folder is referred to as Standalone
Online Watch, and the Online Watch installed with AMS Machinery Health Manager is
referred to as Integrated Online Watch. The differences are:
Using the Standalone Online Watch you will not have the ability to:

Acknowledge Alarms *
View Live Trends *
Perform Demand Acquisitions *
Edit Alarm Limits
* - These abilities can be added. See Adding functionality to the Standalone Online
Watch Client.
Using the Integrated Online Watch you will have the ability to:

Acknowledge Alarms
View Live Trends
Perform Demand Acquisitions
Edit Alarm Limits
For Integrated Online Watch only permissions can be controlled using the RBM
Network Administration tool to edit individual users and allow or disallow the following actions:

Can change alarm limits


Can acknowledge alarms

3-40

Online Watch

Can acquire data on demand


Can trigger data collection
Can view live trends

Adding functionality to the Standalone Online Watch Client


For Standalone Online Watch only a switch can be added to the shortcut after the installation is complete to allow the following abilities:
Acknowledge Alarms
View Live Trends
Perform Demand Acquisitions
The ability to Edit Alarm Limits will still not be available for the Standalone Online
Watch.
Once the switch is added to the shortcut anyone that uses that Standalone Online Watch
shortcut, will have the above mentioned abilities. There is no ability to control permissions
to individual abilities when using this switch, it is all or nothing.
To apply the software switch, edit the properties of the Online Watch shortcut that is created
after running the installation. Add the following software switch (-fallback) after the Target
executable as shown in the example below.

Online Watch Shortcut window

Installing the Standalone Online Watch Client

3-41

Reference Section
This section provides specific information about the function of each field or screen in the
Online Watch program.

3-42

Online Watch

Main Application Window


The Online Watch main application window contains a title bar, menu bar, tool bar, and
status bar. These user interface controls surround the desktop, which is split vertically into
two panes. The left pane contains a hierarchical tree representation of the selected AMS
Machinery Manager database. The content of the right pane depends on what is currently
selected in the tree pane.

Online Watch Main Application Window

Title Bar
The title bar is located at the top of the main window. The application name and the name
of the currently selected database are displayed in the title bar.

Menu Bar
The menu bar is located just below the title bar. The various commands to control and configure Online Watch are located on the menu bar.

Main Application Window

3-43

File Menu Items

Connect...

Displays a dialog box that allows the user to select


the desired Online Server.

Alt-F-C,
Ctrl+N

<MRU> List

Allows for quick connection to the four most


recently used Online Servers.

Alt-F-#
(where # is 1, 2,
3, or 4)

Exit

Closes the application.

Alt-F-X,
Alt+F4

Displays the Alarm Log view.

Alt-V-A,
Ctrl+L

View Menu Items

Alarm Log...

3-44

Auto-Alert
Displays the Auto-Alert Working folder.
Working Folder

Ctrl+A

Manage
Working
Folders...

Displays the Manage Working Folders dialog box.

Alt-V-F, Ctrl+F

Toolbar

Shows or hides the toolbar.

Alt-V-T

Status Bar

Shows or hides the status bar.

Alt-V-S

Online Watch

Tools Menu Items


Displays the Alarm Limit dialog box for
modification of alarm limit information. The submenus allow the user to specify whether they want to
edit Gross Scan AC, Gross Scan DC, or Analysis
Parameter alarms limits. For more information,
please seeAlarm Limit Dialog Box [Alt-T-E] on
page 3-50.

Alt-T-E

Displays a Live Trend window for the selected


Gross Scan AC, Gross Scan DC, or Analysis
Parameter item. For more information, please see
Live Trend Window [Alt-T-L] on page 3-52.

Alt-T-L

Demand
Acquisition

Displays the Demand Acquisition dialog box. For


more information, please see Demand Acquisition
Dialog Box [Alt-T-D] on page 3-53.

Alt-T-D

Reset Min/Max
Indicators

Resets the min/max indicators for the selected Gross Alt-T-R


Scan AC, Gross Scan DC, or Analysis Parameter
item.
Alt-T-R-A
Alt-T-R-D
Alt-T-R-P

Reset All Min/


Max Indicators

Resets all min/max indicators for all items.

Options

Alt-T-O
Displays the Options dialog box. For more
information, please see Options Dialog Box [Alt-TO] on page 3-58.

Edit Alarm
Limits

Live Trend

Alt-T-E-A
Alt-T-E-D
Alt-T-E-P

Alt-T-L-A
Alt-T-L-D
Alt-T-L-P

Alt-T-A

Help Menu Items


Topics...

Displays a context sensitive help window.

Alt-H-T, F1

Graphics Key

Displays the Graphics Key dialog box. For more


information, please see Graphics Key Dialog Box
[Alt-H-G] on page 3-63.

Alt-H-K,
Ctrl+K

About Online
Watch...

Displays the About dialog box which contains


information such as the copyright notice, version
number, and build date.

Alt-H-A

Main Application Window

3-45

Tool Bar
By default, the toolbar is located below the menu bar. However, the toolbar may be docked
to any edge of the main application window. All tool bar buttons correspond to a menu item
on one of the menus on the menu bar. Tool bar buttons offer a quick way to execute a commonly used command. The available tool bar buttons and their corresponding menu items
are shown below.
Connect - File | Connect
Alarm Log - View | Alarm Log
Auto-Alert Working Folder - View | Auto-Alert Working Folder
Edit AL (AC) - Tools | Edit Alarm Limit | AC
Edit AL (DC) - Tools | Edit Alarm Limit | DC
Edit AL (AP) - Tools | Edit Alarm Limit | AP
Live Trend (AC) - Tools | Live Trend | AC
Live Trend (DC) - Tools | Live Trend | DC
Live Trend (AP) - Tools | Live Trend | AP
Options - Tools | Options
Help - Help | Topics

3-46

Online Watch

Signal Gauges
Signal gauges graphically represent the current value and state of a given gross scan or analysis parameter collection. This section will describe the different parts of a signal gauge and
the actions a user may perform on it.
Measurement Points - Table View

Measurement Points - Face Plate View

Signal gauges can be displayed in a detailed table view or a concise face plate view. The
detailed view gives the user more information about a given collection at a glance. However, fewer collections can be displayed on the screen at any given time. The face plate view
allows the user to see more collections at a glance, but displays less information about each
collection.
You can interact with the controls to see additional information or to perform various tasks.
Additional, context-sensitive information can be displayed in a popup data tip window by
causing the mouse pointer to hover over the various components of the signal gauge. Rightclicking on the signal gauge will display popup context menus that contain subsets of the
main menu items available on the main menu bar and tool bar. The following tables define
the data tips and context menus that are available and how to access them.

Signal Gauges

3-47

Context Menu Items

Menu Item

Right-click On

Live Trend

Signal Value Bar

Demand Acquisition

Signal Value Bar

Reset Min/Max Indicators

Signal Value Bar

Add to Working Folder

Signal Value Bar

Edit Alarm Limits

Alarm Limit Bar

Set Display value as Phase


Reference

Signal Value Bar

Note

Set Display value as Phase Reference is only visible in the menu for AP
signal controls and only active in the context of right clicking on a phase
parameter. This is ONLY available on Phase Parameters.

3-48

Online Watch

Data Tips

Information Displayed

Hover Over

Value, Units, Date/Time, Maximum Value,


Minimum Value

Signal Value Bar

Alarm Limits

Alarm Limit Bar

Note

For Phase parameters the displayed HighHigh and High values are calculated from the Phase Reference that has been set using the HighHigh and
High values set in O_Config as deltas. If no phase reference has been set
these values cannot be calculated and the legend No Phase Reference will
be displayed in the data tips. No values will be displayed in any case for Low
and LowLow values as these values are meaningless for Phase parameters.

Signal Gauges

3-49

Alarm Limit Dialog Box [Alt-T-E]


The Alarm Limit dialog box allows users to modify the current alarm limits for the selected
gross scan collection or analysis parameter.

Alarm Limit Dialog box

Online Watch cannot create new alarm limits, it can only modify limits that have been
defined in Online Config and the Alarm Limit dialog box will display only the limits that
have already been defined.
To modify a limit, right-click on its row in the limits table. A small limit editor dialog box
will be displayed over the selected row. Once the desired changes have been made, click
OK to save them or Cancel to discard them. You can also modify the reporting threshold.
Once all desired changes have been made, click OK to save them or Cancel to discard
them. If OK is clicked, an alarm limit change request is sent to the Online Server. The server
notifies the appropriate CSI 4500 unit of the change. Once the CSI 4500 unit has applied
the change, the Online Server commits the change to the database and notifies all connected
clients of the change.
Note

Since the Low and Low Low limits are meaningless they are removed from
the dialog for a phase parameter. In addition, if a phase reference has been
set, the reference value and reference setting mode are displayed.

3-50

Online Watch

Note

This option doesnt exist for Online Watch Clients.

Alarm Limit Dialog Box [Alt-T-E]

3-51

Live Trend Window [Alt-T-L]


The Live Trend window displays both short-term and long-term current trends for gross
scan, tachometer, or analysis parameter data.

Live Trend window

The short-term trend pane displays a trend plot of the 64 most recent values. The long-term
trend pane displays a trend plot containing 128 compressed historical values.
When a new value is reported, it is added to the short-term trend. When the short-term trend
reaches its maximum capacity (i.e. contains 64 values), the short-term trend values are
compressed into a point in the long-term trend and the short-term trend is reset.
Each point in long-term trend represents the minimum, maximum and average of those 64
reported values. The long term trend will be time-stamped with the date/time of the last
amplitude value used in the calculation. Another point will not be added to the long-tern
trend until 64 more values are reported. Therefore, the values in the long term trend will
never exactly match a reported value since it is meant to give historical statistical information.
When the long-term trend reaches its maximum capacity (i.e. contains 128 values), the
oldest value is removed from the trend prior to adding the next value.

3-52

Online Watch

Demand Acquisition Dialog Box [Alt-T-D]


The Demand Acquisition dialog box allows you to define data acquisition on a given
channel to be performed on demand (i.e. in addition to any normally scheduled collections.)

Demand Acquisition Dialog Box

Demand Acquisition Dialog Box [Alt-T-D]

3-53

Once the data acquisition has been defined, you can click the Acquire button to initiate the
collection. After the 4500 unit has finished collecting the requested data, a Data Plot
window will be displayed.

Data Plot window

The Data Plot window can display both spectrum and waveform plots. Various scales, cursors, and other tools are available to analyze the data. For more information about using the
Data Plot window, please see Appendix G Plot Control User Interface Functions.
You cannot store the data collected in the Demand Acquisition mode. It is for display purposes only.

3-54

Online Watch

If you select AP ...

... in the Description dialog box and then press the Acquire button, you will a slightly different Data Plot Window.

Plot Data window with View Parameters button

Demand Acquisition Dialog Box [Alt-T-D]

3-55

An additional button, View Parameters, appears in the window. Press the View Parameters
button and the Parameters window appears

Parameters window

3-56

Online Watch

Manage Working Folders Dialog Box [Ctrl+F, Alt-V-F]


A working folder is a user-defined grouping of signal gauges. Users can use working
folders to organize signal gauges that they want to see on the screen at the same time. The
Manage Working Folders dialog box is used to create, rename or delete working folders.

Manage Working Folders Dialog Box

Working Folders List - A list of the currently defined working folders.


Description - Allows you to name a new working folder or rename an existing working
folder.
Add - Adds a new working folder with the name contained in the Description field.
Rename - Changes the name of the working folder selected in the Working Folder List to
the name contained in the Description field.
Delete - Removes the working folder selected in the Working Folder List. (Confirmation
is required.)
OK - Closes the dialog box and saves any changes.
Cancel - Closes the dialog box and discards any changes.

Manage Working Folders Dialog Box [Ctrl+F, Alt-V-F]

3-57

Options Dialog Box [Alt-T-O]


The Options Dialog Box is used to customize the behavior of Online Watch. The customized settings are remembered for each AMS Machinery Manager user. The dialog box contains two tabs: Display and General.

Display Options
Display Tab

Options - Display Tab

Default View

For components, measurement points, and working folders, two views are available in the
right pane. The Table view provides detailed text and a graphical representation of the current state of the selected item in the tree. The Face Plate view provides a concise graphical
representation only. This option allows the user to specify which view is displayed by
default.

3-58

Online Watch

Face Plate

The Face Plate option allows the user to customize the graphical representation of signal
values. If Line is chosen, a thin line will be used to indicate the current signal value. If Bar
is chosen, data will be displayed as a bar graph. Show Min/Max Indicators acts as a toggle
to display or hide the graphical representation of the minimum and maximum signal values
that have been reported.
Select Colors Based On

Colors are used throughout Online Watch to represent the state of the online system. The
user may choose whether this coloration indicates the state of the system based on alarm
urgency or alarm type.
If Alarm Urgency is chosen, the following color scheme is used:

Urgency

Color

Normal

Green / Black

Report

Green / Black

Notify

Blue

Urgent

Yellow

Critical

Red

If Alarm Type is chosen, the following color scheme is used:

Options Dialog Box [Alt-T-O]

Type

Color

HighHigh

Red

High

Yellow

Normal

Green / Black

Low

Yellow

LowLow

Red

Rate of Change (ROC)

Blue

Absolute Epsilon

Purple

3-59

Graphics Scaling Based On

In order to graphically represent alarm limits and current signal values, you must determine
the upper and lower limits for scaling. Online Watch selects the upper and lower limits
based on this option.
If Sensor Range is selected, Online Watch will use the upper and lower operating ranges for
the sensor/channel as set in the Channel Definition dialog box of Online Config.
If Alarm Limits is selected, Online Watch will calculate the upper and lower limits as percentages above and below the highest and lowest alarm limit values. This most often selects
a subrange within the sensor range and effectively provides a higher resolution on the data
of interest.
If Smart is selected, Online Watch applies the alarm limit scaling described above and then
further restricts the range based on the current signal value. Note that in smart scaling mode,
the range is automatically adjusted if the signal value goes outside the current range. In most
cases, this setting will provide optimal resolution on the data of interest.
Live Trend Scaling

Defines the default scaling when a Live Trend is displayed.

Live Trend Scaling dialog box.

Fixed Scale - The trend is scaled based on its Alarm settings (highest alarm
defined), or a fixed scaled based on value. If the value is <1.0 EGU, the
scale is -1.0 to 1.0 EGU. If the value is >1, then 1MAX AC to +MAX
AC (ex. -35.35 to 35.35 GS if max input is 0 - 35.35 GS RMS) scale is
used if no limits are defined.
Auto Scale - The trend is scaled to approximately 5% less than the smallest
value and approximately 5% more than largest value.

3-60

Online Watch

DCS Selection

DCS = Data Collection Set. It specifies when data is to be collected, what data is to be collected, what the alarm criteria are, etc. DCSs are tied to points in a many to one relationship.

DCS Selection dialog box

The default is automatic selection On. With this option selected, a DCS will be automatically selected in the Measurement Point view in an attempt to select the DCS of most
interest. The following criteria are used for selection:
1) If a Measurement Point has only one DCS that DCS will be automatically selected.
2) If a Measurement Point has more than one predicate based DCS, the first
DCS in the list that is in the TRUE state will be selected.
3) If a Measurement Point has more than one predicate based DCS and a
DCS that is selected goes FALSE, the first DCS in the list that is in the
TRUE state will be selected.
4) If, in the case that a Measurement Point has more than one predicate
based DCS, the selected DCS is not changed if another DCS goes
TRUE.
5) If a Measurement Point has both predicate based and Time based DCSs
and all predicate based DCSs are in the FALSE state, the first time
based DCS will be selected. If in this case a predicate based DCS is in
the TRUE state or goes TRUE while a time based DCS is selected, the
predicate based DCS will be selected.
If automatic selection is turned off, the first DCS in the list will be selected when the Measurement Point view is entered. If it is desired to view a particular DCS, that DCS must be
manually selected.

Options Dialog Box [Alt-T-O]

3-61

General Tab

Options General Tab

Startup
The startup options allow you to customize the behavior of Online Watch when the application is launched.
Do Not Automatically Connect to a Server - You will need to connect to an Online
Server manually by selecting Connect from the File menu.
Automatically Connect to the Most Recently Used Server - Online Watch will
attempt to connect to the last server used during the last execution of Online Watch.
Automatically Connect to This Server - Online Watch will attempt to connect to the
specified server. The server name field will be disabled unless this option is selected. The
field accepts either a server host name or an IP address.

3-62

Online Watch

Graphics Key Dialog Box [Alt-H-G]


The Graphics Key Dialog Box displays all of the alarm types and alarm urgency icons used
in Online Watch and an explanation of their meanings.

Graphics Key Dialog Box

Graphics Key Dialog Box [Alt-H-G]

3-63

User Roles and Polices


Online Watch can be installed and executed as either an integrated part of AMS Machinery
Manager or as a standalone application. When in integrated mode, Online Watch is aware
of which user is currently logged into AMS Machinery Manager and assigns the appropriate roles and polices access permissions. When in standalone mode, Online Watch
assigns Guest User access permissions. Guest Users are considered read-only users and
have no permissions.
The following roles are available in Online Watch:
Analyst
Data Collector
Database Manager.
Note

If a user does not have one of the roles listed above, he or she will have read
only access.
Definition of Roles

Analyst = allows a user full functionality with the analysis programs.


Data Collector = allows the creation and modification of vibration, motor, and IR routes,
and the loading and dumping of these routes.
Database Manager = encompases all database management functionality, alarm creation,
and modification.

3-64

Online Watch

The following table shows the relationship of the various policies to features in Online
Watch. Assigning a policy or policies to a role adds additional functionality to that role. Any
of the policies below can be assigned to any of the roles. Multiple policies can be added to
each role.
Policy

Explanation

Technologies

Power User

Power User

All

Change Alarm Limits

Online Watch: Can Change Alarm


Limits

Online

Acknowledge Alarms

Online Watch: Can Acknowledge


Alarms

Online

Acquire Data on Demand

Online Watch: Can Acquire Data on


Demand

Online

Can View Live Trends

Online Watch: Can View Live Trends Online

Change Configurations

Online Configuration: Can Change


Existing Configurations

Online

Add and Delete

Online Configuration: Can Add and


Delete

Online

Commission

Online Configuration: Can


Commission

Online

Note

For example, a user must have Change Alarm Limits assigned as one of
his policies in order to enable or disable relays.

Note

User Roles and Policies must be set by the RBMadmin application. See
chapter 3 of the Installation and Administration manual or the online help
under the RBMadmin application for details.

User Roles and Polices

3-65

-- Fallback
If the -- Fallback permission is in place in O-Watch Client (For details, see Adding functionality to the Standalone Online Watch Client on page 3 - 41.), then the user will have
the following permissions.

3-66

Permission

Feature

Can Acknowledge Alarms

Alarm Acknowledgment

Can Acquire Data on Demand

Demand Acquisition / Enable and


Disable Relays

Can View Live Trends

Live Trends

Online Watch

Appendix

Creating and Configuring Hardware

Creating CSI 4500 Units in the Online Database


Each CSI 4500 hardware unit in your Online system must be configured using the Online
Config application before use. The first step in configuring the CSI 4500 unit is to create the
unit in the database.
There are two methods for creating CSI 4500 units using the Online Config application: the
Discovery method and the Offline method.

Discovery Method
Using the Discovery method, all available CSI 4500 units will be detected automatically
when you connect to the Online Server.

A-1

Connect to an online server by selecting Online Server from the File menu, then on the
popup menu at the right, select Open. Navigate to the desired server and click OK.

File Menu - Online Server - Open

Once you have connected to the Online Server, all available CSI 4500 units in the system
will announce themselves and be automatically detected by Online Config.

A-2

All available units will now be visible in the tree under the Available Units folder in the left
pane of the Online Config window. The units will be listed by their ethernet addresses.

A-3

Right-click on the unit of interest and select Insert. This will move the unit from Available
into the CSI 4500 units folder. This unit will have an abbreviation and description of New
with the correct ethernet address. This can be seen in the units property view.

Right click on a select and then select Insert from dialog box (above).
Below, in the right hand pane, the Unit Properties View appears

A-4

Assign the CSI 4500 an abbreviation and description by entering text into the Abbreviation
and Description fields. The abbreviations must be unique within the database, therefore if
multiple units are added these fields will automatically be modified and the changes
applied.

A-5

Offline Method
You can also create and configure the CSI 4500 units using the Offline method. This
method allows you to set up a database offsite or before the actual hardware is installed.
This is accomplished using a template database.
On the File menu, select Template Database, then on the popup menu, select New.

When Online Config is started in this mode of operation, an untitled database template is
displayed in the tree view. You may begin adding units to the current database or select an
already existing template database.

A-6

To add a CSI 4500 unit to an offline database, either right-click on the CSI 4500 units folder
in the tree and select Add, or select Insert from the menu and select New CSI 4500 Unit.
Next, select which type of unit in use. Finally, click the OK button.

CSI 4500 Units Folder Context Menu

A-7

Select a unit consistent with the configured hardware, and then click the OK button

Support of CSI 4500 Firmware

There are two ongoing versions of CSI 4500 firmware associated with the old and new
CPU types.
It is possible to have installations with both old and new CSI 4500 units each requiring different firmware. The choices in the graphic above depend on the hardware configured on
your system.
Note

The CSI 4500T and CSI 4500M icons look similar, but reperesent different
configurations. Select the icon that correctly matches the physical configuration.

A-8

This adds a unit to the tree and display its properties in the right-hand pane. The abbreviation and description will be empty and the ethernet address will be incomplete.
Select the desired unit type, click OK.

Because abbreviations must be unique, you must fill in the abbreviation and description and
apply these changes before additional CSI 4500 units can be added. If the ethernet address
is known the user may fill that in, or wait until a connection to the Online Server is established.
If the unit is a CSI 4500T ...

... there are addition fields that may be configured. Those fields are:
Transient Ethernet Address - The CSI 4500 Transient Daughterboard has its own Ethernet
address. This is where you may view and/or assign the value to be encoded in the transient
daughterboard. This value can be read from the CSI 4500T LCD.

A-9

External Network Folder Specifications - These fields allow you to configure the streaming
location for the CSI 4500T transient data. The default streaming location is the provided
internal hard drive. However, you may choose to provide an external NAS drive as an alternative transient streaming location. The specified external NAS drive may be used as either
the primary streaming location (replacing the internal hard drive) or as a fail safe location
in the event of the internal hard drive failure.
UNC Path - Input the UNC path to the folder on the NAS drive where this CSI 4500T unit
should stream its transient data.
Allowed Drive Space - Indicate in GigaBytes the space allowed for transient data. This
must be between 1 and 100 GB.
Use Drive Space As - Indicate whether you wish the external NAS drive to be used as the
primary streaming location (replacing the internal hard drive) or as a fail safe location in the
event of the internal hard drive failure.
Note

Even if the drive is specified as the fail safe location, the CSI 4500T unit will
allocate the space allowed on the specified drive in order to minimize data
loss upon a drive failure.
Credentials - Specify the user name and password to be used by the CSI 4500T for access
to the specified drive location.

A-10

Once the unit has announced itself as an available unit, right-click on the available unit and
select Merge.

Available Units Context Menu

A-11

Merge will display a list of the units in the database. Select the appropriate one, and its ethernet address will be updated to that of the available unit.

Available Units Dialog Box

Once the units have been created in the database they can be configured.

A-12

Configuring the CSI 4500 Unit


Right-click on the newly created unit and select Configure Unit, or select Configure Unit
from the Actions menu.
Note

Because this is an online system, actions taken by one client can impact
other connected clients.

Configuring the CSI 4500 Unit

A-13

Card Configuration
This unit is created offline. All card slots are empty. Each card must be added by the user.
If the unit was announced via the Online Server, the card configuration would be complete.

Offline Unit - CSI 4500 Card Context Menu

Offline Unit - CSI 4500S Card Context Menu

A-14

To add a card, select the appropriate card type for that slot: Multiplexer, Tachometer, or Digital I/O.
SIG, SIG (Transient) install options:
Slot 1, 2 = Signal
Slot 3 = Tach
Slot 4 = Digital I/0
If is imperative that the database configuration matches your physical configuration. The
software will let you set up a database configuration that does not match your physcical
configuration, which could lead to problems.

Configuring the CSI 4500 Unit

A-15

CSI 4500 Front Panel with Cards Displayed

CSI 4500S Front Panel with Cards Displayed

A-16

Generic Operations for Channels

Activate - A card may be activated or deactivated by positioning the cursor over the card,
right-clicking, and selecting Activate. If the card is active there will be a check mark by
Active.
Copy - position the cursor over the card to be copied, right-click, and select Copy. This will
copy the card and all of its channels to the applications clipboard.
Cut - Position the cursor over the card to be cut, right-click, and select Cut.
Paste - Position the cursor over the card slot where you wish to paste the contents of the
clipboard, right-click, and select Paste.
Delete - Position the cursor over the card to be deleted, right-click, and select Delete.
Signal Channel Configuration

Place the cursor over the channel to be configured and right-click. Select Define to set up
the channel and sensor.

CSI 4500 Front Panel with Context Menu for Channel Displayed

Configuring the CSI 4500 Unit

A-17

A signal channel may either be classified as a vibration type channel or a process channel.
Select the type of channel and click Setup.

Signal Channel Definition Dialog

Note

The Channel Description is required and must be unique within a given unit.

A-18

Vibration Channel Setup

Channel Definition dialog

If the selected sensor type is a displacement probe, there are additional settings available.
DC Display Mode - This setting controls whether the Gross Scan DC data is displayed in
mils/microns or volts.
Resting DC Voltage - This represents the DC voltage level when a shaft is in its resting or
slow roll position.
Bearing Clearance - This represents the available clearance in mils. It is equal to the bearing
diameter minus the shaft journal diameter.
The Resting DC Voltage and Bearing Clearance values entered are used by the Diagnostic
Analysis application for the generation of shaft centerline plots of transient data. The shaft
centerline plot shows changes in the average position of the shaft centerline in two dimensions. It is constructed from the DC portion of the vibration signal.
There are addition considerations for measurement point setup that must be met in order to
enable the generation of shaft centerline plots. Those conditions are covered in the section
Measurement Point on page B-20.

Configuring the CSI 4500 Unit

A-19

The first step in setting up a channel is to define the sensor that is attached to the channel.
Select the type of sensor to be used. Only AC sensors are attached to vibration channels.
Following is a list of AC sensors:

Accelerometer
Velometer
Displacement Probe
AC
Microphone
Current Clamp
Flux Coil

After the sensor type is chosen, click the ... button. This will display a list of defined sensors
of the type chosen. You can choose an already defined sensor or define a new one by
selecting New.

Sensor Selection Dialog

A-20

Click OK if you are creating a new sensor or Edit to modify an existing sensor definition.
This will display the Sensor Definition dialog box.

Sensor Definition Dialog Box

The fields that define a sensor are the following:


Sensor Description - a descriptive name for the sensor. For example, General Purpose
Accelerometer etc.
Characteristics
Sensitivity - The sensor sensitivity is used to compute the actual sensor
value in engineering units from the raw value in volts. The actual value is
equal to the sensitivity raw value.
Offset - Typically zero for AC sensors.
Units - A descriptive string for the units of a general AC sensor. (Not applicable for standard sensors.)

Configuring the CSI 4500 Unit

A-21

Note

The engineering units are calculated as

Physical Limits
AC Upper - The AC alarms are used to determine dynamic sensor faults.
The upper limit is maximum value in the operating range of the sensor.
AC Lower - The lower limit is the minimum value in the operating range
of the sensor.
DC Upper - The DC alarms are used to determine a sensor fault based on
the DC biasing of the sensor. The upper limit is the maximum allowable
bias voltage.
DC Lower - The lower limit is the sensors minimum allowable bias
voltage.

A-22

Default values for many sensors can be obtained by selecting the desired sensor from the
Emerson warehouse.

Warehouse Sensor Selection Dialog

Configuring the CSI 4500 Unit

A-23

Once the sensor has been chosen, the channel can be setup.

Signal Channel Definition Dialog

The following fields define a signal channel:


Hardware Integration - An analog signal channel on the CSI 4500 has a built-in hardware integrator that can be turned on or off with this setting. This is only valid for accelerometers and velometers.
Sensor Power - Sensors can be powered by the CSI 4500s 24 volt supply or by an
external power supply if necessary. If the sensor will use the CSI 4500s power supply, the
Sensor Power box should be checked.
Transient Channel - This indicates whether the channel has been commissioned for transient acquisition. It is provided as a status indicator only and is never available for selection.
It will be checked once the channel has gone through the transient commissioning process.
Gain and Attenuation - The gain value that will be applied to the signal. The choices are
+10v (x1/2), +5v (x1), +1v (x)5, and +500mv (x10).

A-24

DSP Gain - This gain setting is used when scanning the channels for time waveform/spectral information. You can specify a gain setting for each channel at every acquisition. For
example, selecting a fixed value for DSP gain speeds up acquisition. However, selecting
autorange allows DSP to select the optimum gain each time, thus giving you the best
results.
Application - By selecting the application for which the sensor is being used the operating
limits on the channel will be set with appropriate defaults. Otherwise they will default to the
limits defined on the sensor. The specific applications may also change the Input Gain
setting.

Application Dialog Box Components_type_dialog_box.gif (insert here)

AC Upper and Lower Limits - The AC limits for the channel allows the user to define
an operating range as a subset of the full sensor range. For example, a 100G accelerometer
on a machine that only operates up to 20Gs. By setting the AC upper limit to 20 Gs, the user
is notified if a reading occurs that is valid for the sensor but invalid for this particular application.
DC Upper and Lower Limits - The DC limits for the channel would currently default
to those of the sensor attached. The user can modify these limits.

Configuring the CSI 4500 Unit

A-25

AC Data Mode

AC Data Mode Definition

This selection will only be available for signal channels that have transient capabilities
available. When a Transient Filter Board is present, the CSI 4500T continuously calculates
the peak-to-peak value of each channel's waveform. This selection allows users to use the
proximity probes real peak-to-peak values instead of the calculated RMS values as the AC
component of the Gross Scan data.
Process Channel Setup
5

Process channel setup is a subset of the vibration channel setup. Following are the fields that
define a process channel:
Sensor Type - This is selected and created in the same manner as AC sensor types.
Sensor Range - This field is only available for DC sensors. This allows the user to select a
+/- 10 volt or +/- 24 volt range for the sensor. (Default setting is +/- 10 volts.) For channels
connected to thrust probes, the +/- 24 volt range is recommended.
Sensor Description - This field is read only.

A-26

Application - By selecting the application for which the sensor is being used, the operating
limits on the channel will be set with appropriate defaults. Otherwise, they will default to
the limits defined in the sensor.
DC Upper and Lower Limits - The DC limits for the channel would currently default
to those of the sensor attached. The user can modify these limits.
Gross Scan DC Limits - Clicking DC Limits displays the dialog for setting the corresponding limits. This is identical to that described for the vibration channel setup.

Configuring the CSI 4500 Unit

A-27

Using the Channel Definition Wizard


To open the wizard,

Right-click on a channel, and choose Channel Definition Wizard from the popup
menu.

Popup menu for the Channel Definition Wizard.

A-28

This opens the Channel Definition Wizard dialog box.

Channel Definition Wizard dialog box

There is only one configuration option at this point: a single check box asking if you
want to configure multiple channels. If you choose to configure multiple channels,
two additional dialogs show. If you are creating only one channel, then only one
additional dialog is shown.
Click on the check box and then click Next.
The next screen is important. If we had chosen not to configure multiple channels, the Next
button would be a Finished button.
Type of measurement is the same as in the manual setup process.
Under Select Sensor, the sensor setup has been optimized. Base on the location to
pull a sensor a different drop down box appears.

Configuring the CSI 4500 Unit

A-29

From Database

If you select From Database, the existing list of defined (like) sensors displays in the
dropdown box.

Configuring Properties, from database

You can activate Hardware Integration and Sensor Power.


Click Next

A-30

From Warehouse

If you select From Warehouse, the predefined Warehouse list of sensors displays in the
dropdown box.

Configuring Properties, from warehouse

You can activate Hardware Integration and Sensor Power.


Click Next
Create New Sensor

If you select Create New Sensor, the dropdown box is disabled.


You can activate Hardware Integration and Sensor Power.
Click Next.

Configuring the CSI 4500 Unit

A-31

From Create New Sensor, a special dialog box appears. From here, you need to enter:

Create New Sensor: configure signal channel properties

Sensor Sensitivity
Sensor Offset (if defining a Static/DC sensor)
Sensor AC Range (EGU)
Sensor DC Range (DC Volts)
If you are configuring more than one sensor, click Next at the bottom of the screen to continue configuring sensors. If you are only creating one sensor, click Finish.

A-32

Advanced Button

On the main dialog screen, there is an Advanced button next to the type of measurement.
You can configure the following in Advanced Mode:

Advanced properties

Select Applications: by clicking on one of the pictured applications, which adjusts


to a predefined gain and is attenuated, based on application.
Input Gain (Gain and Attenuation)
DSP Gain

Configuring the CSI 4500 Unit

A-33

Multiple Channel Selection

If you are creating multiple points, you need to put a check next to the question Would you
like to configure multiple signal channels? on the Welcome screen.

Configuring Properties, from database

A dialog box appears prompting you for unique names. This forces the system to show a
dialog for unique hardware channel name entry.

A-34

Sequential Selection

To configure multiple channels, you must select the ones you want to set by highlighting
them in the list. Hold down the Shift key while selecting to choose more than one entry
on the list.

Select channels sequentially by holding down the Shift key as you highlight.

For example, if you want to select channels 3, 4, 5, and 6, hold down the shift key, click
channel 3, then click channel 6. This should highlight all the channels between 3 and 6.
Non-Sequential Selection

To select channels in any order, hold down the Ctrl key while selecting. For example, you
want to highlight channels 2, 4, 6, and 8. Hold down the Ctrl key, click channel 2, then channels 4, 6, and 8. This should highlight only the channels you want. Click Finish.

Configuring the CSI 4500 Unit

A-35

The Unique Dialog box appears. Enter the name for a channel, and click OK to name the
next channel. Once all channels have unique names, you are finished.

The Unique Description dialog box

A-36

Tachometer Channel Configuration


Position the cursor over the channel to be configured and right-click. Select Define to set up
the physical tachometer attached to this channel.

Tachometer Setup Dialog

Define the following fields to set up the tachometer:


Channel Description - Enter a text description of the channel for identification.
Trigger
Adaptive - If checked, the CSI 4500 will find an acceptable trigger level for
a tachometer
Level - If adaptive is not checked, the user must manually set the voltage
level at which to trigger.
Rising/Falling Edge - Select which edge of the pulse on which to trigger.
Gain - If checked, the tach signal gain will be increased by 5.
Transient Channel - This indicates whether the channel has been commissioned for transient acquisition. It is provided as a status indicator only and is never available for selection.
It will be checked once the channel has gone through the transient commissioning process.

Configuring the CSI 4500 Unit

A-37

Ratio
Hardware Divider - If checked, the ratio will be applied to the tach signal
via the hardware. Otherwise, it will be applied in the software.
Software Factor - If checked, the ratio will be applied to the tach signal via
the software.
Ratio - The ratio to be applied to the tach signal. If applied by hardware the
value must be an integer.
Operational Range
Upper Limit - maximum expected speed.
Lower Limit - minimum expected speed. Entering a minimum helps speed
up scanning but prevents seeing the tach values below this point.
Alarm Limits - The alarm limits are setup identically to the limits applied for Gross Scan.
Virtual Tachometers

Suppose you have two shafts connected by a gearbox, a 1x physical tachometer on one of
the shafts and you want to do orderbased collection on both shafts. To collect data on the
first shaft you would reference the physical tachometer directly in its collections. To collect
data on the second shaft you would define a virtual tachometer whose ratio was the same
as the gear ratio and reference the virtual tachometer in collections on that shaft.
Note

The virtual tachometer may not be used for balancing purposes since it it is
not a true once-per-revolution indicator.
You can also use a virtual tachometer to display values other than RPM. Suppose you
wanted to display angular velocity instead. You would create a virtual tachometer and enter
a ratio value of
(=6.283) which would result in a value of radians per second.
Note

Virtual tachometers used in this fashion should not be referenced by data


collections since the resulting value is not in RPM.

A-38

You can create up to 4 virtual tachometers for each physical tachometer. To create a virtual
tach, position the cursor over the channel, right-click, and select Define Virtual Tach.

Virtual Tach Selection Dialog

Click Add to define a virtual tach, or select an existing virtual tach from the list and click
Edit.

Virtual Tach Definition Dialog

Configuring the CSI 4500 Unit

A-39

A virtual tach has the following fields:


Description - Enter a text description for identification.
Factor - Enter the ratio to be applied to the associated physical tachometer. This number is
always applied in software and will be used as a multiplier (factor) to the current reading in
frequency of the physical tachometer specified.
When finished click OK.

Digital I/O Channel Configuration


Place the cursor over the channel to be configured, right-click, and select Define to setup
the Digital I/O channel.

Digital Input/Output Definition popup menu.

The following fields define the channels setup:


Channel Description - A text description for identification.
Type - Select Input or Output; this is read from the CSI 4500 unit.
Normally - Select Open or Closed; this specifies the relays state when not energized. Typical relays are normally open; which means that energizing the relay causes it to close. In
various fail-safe applications a normally closed relay is used and the relay opens when it is
energized. A normally closed setting causes the CSI 4500 to use inverted logic when evaluating an input relay or setting an output relay.

A-40

State Description - Customize what is displayed in Online Watch/Config when that state
is True/False.
Note

The text in the True and False state description fields is displayed to operators in Online Watch. Effective notification would be Fail, Ok, High
Vibe, etc. t6
There is a convenient way to list all the predicates and alarm enunciations that reference an
output relay. Position the cursor on the desired relay, right click, and select Report. If the
relay is a defined output relay, then a report will be generated listing all the predicates that
reference this relay. Included are the gross scan alarm limits for the channels referenced by
the predicate. Also, if the output relay has been selected for alarm enunciation, then all the
Gross Scan and AP alarm limit levels, owning DCS, measurement point, component,
equipment, and area will be included.

Generic Operations for Channels


Activate - Channels may be activated or de-activated either by toggling the switch on the
front panel, or by positioning the cursor over the channel to be activated, right-clicking, and
selecting Activate.
Commission - Position the cursor over the channel to be commissioned, right-click and
select Commissioning. Please see Appendix F Commissioning of this manual for additional information on Commissioning.
Copy - Position the cursor over the channel whose setup is to be copied, right-click, and
select Copy. This will copy all the channels information to the applications clipboard.
Cut - Position the cursor over the channel whose setup is to be copied, right-click, and select
Cut. This will cut all the channels information and place it in the applications clipboard.
Paste - Position the cursor over the channel where you wish to place the contents of the
clipboard, right-click, and select Paste.
Delete - Position the cursor over the channel you wish to remove, right-click, and select
Delete.

Configuring the CSI 4500 Unit

A-41

Constant Tachs
In addition to Physical tachs and the Virtual tachs, Constant tachs can be created and
attached to the unit.
Constant tachometers allow you to perform limited orderbased acquisitions without a
physical tachometer. While this is certainly not the preferred method, it can be useful when
monitoring a constant speed component such as a fan. It can also be helpful if a physical
tachometer fails and you need to continue collecting data and its better to have some data
thats not perfect rather than no data at all. You cannot request Synchronous Peak or Synchronous Phase parameters in a collection which references a constant tachometer.
If you define any constant speed components Online Config will automatically create one
or more constant tachometers when you assign them to a CSI 4500.

CSI 4500 Unit - Context Menu - Create Constant Tach

A-42

To create a constant tach, right-click over the desired CSI 4500 unit and select Create Constant Tach, or highlight the CSI 4500 unit and select New Constant Tach under the Insert
menu.

Constant Tach Selection Dialog

Configuring the CSI 4500 Unit

A-43

Click Add to define a constant tach, or select an existing constant tach from the list and click
Edit.

Constant Tach Setup Dialog

A constant tach has the following fields:


Description - Enter a text description for identification
Speed - Enter the constant speed.
When finished click OK.
Additional Functions Available for CSI 4500 Units

The Copy and Paste functions are available for creating identical CSI 4500 units in the database.
Copy - Position the cursor over the CSI 4500 unit to be duplicated, right-click, and select
Copy, or highlight the CSI 4500 unit and select Copy from the Edit menu. This will place
the unit in the applications clipboard. You can choose to copy all cards, channels, constant
tachs and predicates. The copy operation will generate a unique abbreviation for the unit but
you will need to update the ethernet address.
Paste - Place the cursor over the Units folder, right-click, and select Paste, or highlight the
Unit folder and select Paste from the Edit menu.

A-44

Unit Report

Once the CSI 4500 unit has been configured, a customizable report detailing the CSI 4500
units setup is available. To generate this report, position the cursor over the unit of interest,
right-click, and select Report, or highlight the unit and select Report from the Actions
menu.

Unit Report Dialog

Configuring the CSI 4500 Unit

A-45

To customize the report, click Customize and check the sections to be included in the report.

Report Customize Dialog

A-46

The 4500 conforms to the following standards to meet the requirements for
application of the CE mark.
EN 61000-6-2: 2005
EN 61000-6-4: 2007

Configuring the CSI 4500 Unit

A-47

A-48

Appendix

Defining Equipment to be Monitored

Introduction
The online database used by your 4500 Online system consists of:
the equipment being monitored,
the hardware that monitors it, and
the way in which data is collected.
This Appendix explains how to define the equipment being monitored in your Online
system. This concept is referred to as the Logical Hierarchy.

B-1

The Logical Hierarchy


Database
The Database Global screen is where you define general information about the database, in
particular various identification and labeling preferences.
General Information Tab

Database Global Insert Components

B-2

dB References Tab

Database - dB References

The References tab also allows you to specify the preferred mode for display of data values;
e.g. Peak for Velocity.
For more information on the Global Database properties screens, please refer to Chapter 3
Database Setup/Management of the AMS Machinery Manager manual.

The Logical Hierarchy

B-3

Below the database level, the logical hierarchy of the Online database consists of four distinct levels beginning with Areas, which is represented by the Areas folder in the left pane
of the Online Config window.

Tree View Expanded Down to Measurement Point Level

The following list explains each of the four levels of the logical hierarchy:
Area - the highest level of the logical hierarchy. The Area provides a logical
grouping to the equipment being monitored.
Equipment - refers to a machine train such as a motor-pump combination, where
the motor and pump are components of the machine train.
Component - refers to the actual machine being monitored (i.e. a motor, gearbox,
fan, etc.)
Measurement Point - the physical location on the component of the sensor collecting data. Each measurement point has a one-to-one correspondence to a signal
channel on the 4500 unit.

B-4

Area
The first step in setting up the logical hierarchy is to create an Area.
Position the cursor over the Areas folder in the left pane of the Online Config window,
right-click, and select Add Area, or select the Areas folder and from the menu under Insert,
select New Area.

Context Menu for Areas Folder

The Logical Hierarchy

B-5

At this point, you will need to edit two fields that define the Area Properties.

The fields that define Area Properties are as follows:


Abbreviation - Enter an abbreviation of the area name (up to 4 characters). This abbreviation must be unique within the entire database.
Description - Enter a detailed description of the area (up to 32 characters.)
After you have defined the Area Properties by editing the fields on this screen, click the
Apply button to accept the information.

Equipment
After you have defined the Area, the next step is to define the Equipment contained in that
Area.

B-6

Position the cursor over the Area, right-click, and select Add Equipment from the popup
menu, or click on the Area and from the Insert menu select New Equipment.

Context Menu for Area

At this point, you will need to edit several fields that define the Equipment Train Properties.

The Logical Hierarchy

B-7

The fields that define the Equipment Train Properties are as follows.
Abbreviation - Enter an abbreviation for the equipment train (up to 10 characters). This
abbreviation must be unique within this area.
Description - Enter a detailed description of the equipment train (up to 28 characters).
Speed Section - This information is used by AMS Machinery Managers advanced analysis programs. (e.g. Plot Data)
Reference RPM - The normal operating speed of the machine. This value
cannot be zero.
Speed unit - select from:
RPM - Rotations per Minute
FPM - Feet per Minute
Speed Conversion Factor - Enter the factor needed to convert to Feet per
Minute.

B-8

Component
This level of the logical hierarchy contains the actual machines that will be monitored by
the Online system. To define the components that make up the equipment train, place the
cursor over the Equipment then right-click and select Add Component from the popup
menu, or highlight the Equipment folder and from the menu under Insert, select New Component.
There are four or five tabs containing fields for defining each component, depending on the
Monitoring Unit type.
Definition Tab

Component View - Definition Tab

Abbreviation - Enter an abbreviation of the component (up to 10 characters). This abbreviation must be unique under the equipment train
Description - Enter a detailed description of the component (up to 24 characters).
Speed - Define the speed type of the component by selecting either Constant or Variable.

The Logical Hierarchy

B-9

Type - Click the Select button to display the Component Type selection dialog box.

Component Type Selection Dialog

Select the type of component and click OK. This will update the description.
Physical Characteristic Section
Orientation - Define the orientation of the component. Select one of the following orientation descriptions:

Unknown
Horizontal
Vertical
Angular

B-10

Mounting - Define the mounting position of the component. Select one of the following:

Unknown
Other
Bottom
Top
End
Side
3

Manufacturer Tab

Component View - Manufacturer Tab

Manufacturer Identification (Optional)- Enter a manufacturer ID.


Manufacturer Abbreviation (Optional) - Enter an abbreviated description of the manufacturer.

The Logical Hierarchy

B-11

Manufacturer Description (Optional)- Enter a longer description of the manufacturer.


Monitoring Unit Tab

From this screen you can select which 4500 should monitor this component. This option is
only available when physical units have been defined.

Component View - Monitoring Unit Tab

Select the 4500 unit to monitor this component.


Note

This option will NOT be available if no measurement points have been created on the unit.

B-12

Click Attach to display a list of available units. Only 4500s which have sufficient resources
available to monitor the points under this component will be displayed in the selection list.

4500 Unit Selection Dialog

Select the desired 4500 unit from the dialog box and click OK.

The Logical Hierarchy

B-13

After a 4500 has been selected to monitor this component, select the default tach for the
component. This tach will be used by all measurement points defined for this component
unless another tach has been explicitly selected for that measurement point.

Tach Selection Dialog

Select the type of tach desired by clicking Physical, Virtual, or Constant, then select the specific tach and click OK.
The following fields in the Default Tach section will be filled in when a tach is selected:
Type - Physical, Virtual, or Constant
Channel - The 4500 channel number of the tach.
Description - User-defined description of the tach.
An initial assignment of points to available signal channels has been done. To view the auto
selection, highlight each measurement point in the list. The following fields will be
updated:
Description - the description of the channel assigned to the highlighted
measurement point.
Number - the number of the channel assigned to the highlighted measurement point

B-14

To modify a particular assignment, highlight the measurement point of interest and click the
... button. This will display a list of signal channels.

Signal Channel Selection Dialog

Selecting a channel that was auto-assigned to another measurement point will remove the
previous assignment and leave that measurement point without a channel assigned.

The Logical Hierarchy

B-15

The default tach selected will be used for all measurement points on this component unless
a specific tach is selected for a measurement point. A tach channel may also be selected for
the highlighted measurement point by clicking the ... button.

Select the type of tach desired by clicking Physical, Virtual or Constant, then select the specific tach, and click OK.
The following fields will be filled in when a tach is selected:
Channel - The channel number of the tachometer on the 4500 unit.
Type - Physical, Virtual, or Constant.
Description - A description of the tachometer.
After you have defined the parameters on each of the five Component Properties, click on
Apply to accept the values you entered.

B-16

Mounting Angles Tab


Note

This tab will only be available on components monitored by a 4500T


Machinery Health Monitor Unit.

Mounting Angle Tab at Component View

This screen allows for the location of the sensors mounted on the component in degrees
opposite the direction of rotation. This information is used by the Diagnostic Analysis tool
to display orbit and shaft centerline displays of transient data, even if the sensors are not
mounted exactly 90 degrees apart. The direction of rotation and sensor mounting angles are
not required for legacy online application.
There are addition considerations for measurement point setup that must be met in order to
enable the generation of orbit or shaft centerline plots. Those conditions are covered in
Measurement Point on page B-20.

The Logical Hierarchy

B-17

Select the Rotation Direction and the view from which you are specifying the rotation. The
Rotation Direction may either be specified from the driver or driven component end.
Sensor mounting angles are to be measured from top dead center in degrees opposite the
rotating direction as illustrated.
Component Report

Once the component has been configured, you can generate a report of the setup by positioning the cursor over the component in the tree, right-clicking, and selecting Report, or
from the menu under Actions, select Report.

Component Report Dialog

B-18

To customize the report click on Customize and check the section to be included in the
report.

Customize Component Report Dialog

The Logical Hierarchy

B-19

Measurement Point
Measurement Point refers to the physical location and mounting of the sensors that collect
data on a component.

Component Context Menu

You can add measurement points from the database tree. Position the cursor over the component, right-click, and select Add Measurement Point, or highlight the component and
select Measurement Point from the Insert menu.

B-20

Point Definition Tab

Measurement Point - Point Definition Tab

Location of Point - Click on the highlighted point and drag it to the desired location.
Abbreviation - Enter a 3-character abbreviation. This must be unique under the entire
equipment train, not just this component.
Description - Enter a detailed description of the point (up to 32 characters.)
Reference RPM - Enter a non-zero reference RPM. This is used by AMS Machinery
Managers detailed analysis programs.

The Logical Hierarchy

B-21

Physical Characteristics
Orientation - Select from the following choices for the orientation of the
sensor:

Other
Horizontal
Vertical
Axial
Radial
Radial X
Radial Y
Tangential

Position - Select from the following choices for the placement of the
sensor:

Other
Inboard Bearing
Outboard Bearing
Housing
Foundation
Pipe / Duct

Companion Point - Certain types of vibration analysis involve taking data on two channels simultaneously. The Companion Point selection allows you to specify which other
Measurement Point should be collected together with the current point. Select a point from
the list for simultaneous data collection.
You can also request that the Online Server not pair channels automatically.

B-22

The screen below is an example of the companion measurement point setup with No
Companioning selected. This feature is useful if there are channels that are very dynamic
and may cause an over-range of the signal measurement. In most cases, you would not
want this channel paired automatically with another channel that has steady vibration,
because that may cause a time penalty.
If you select Automatic Companioning, the server pairs similar collections to improve collection time cycles. If you select a specific channel, this forces specific channel pairing.

Point Definition tab with No Companioning selected.

Note

Only identically configured collection sets belonging to the measurement


points can be combined. It is possible to define companion points and still
not have simultaneously collected data.

The Logical Hierarchy

B-23

If this is commissioned for transient ...

... there are special considerations to keep in mind when setting the physical characteristics
and companion point. If those settings meet the following rules, then orbit and shaft centerline plots will be available on the transient data.
1) . . The measurement points must be manually companioned.
2) . . The measurement points orientation must be orthogonal (horizontal/vertical or
radial X/radial Y).
3) . . The measurement points position must match.
If any one of these conditions is not meet, then the Diagnostics Analysis application will not
generate an orbit or shaft centerline plot for data under these measurement points.

Fault Frequencies Tab

Measurement Point - Fault Frequencies Tab

Fault Frequencies - Double-click on a fault frequency ID to add it to a measurement


point.

B-24

Fault frequencies identify specific frequencies within the vibration spectra of a piece of
Equipment whose amplitude patterns may indicate potential failure; for example, bearings,
gears, belts, etc. Fault frequencies indicate the location on the plot where peaks would occur
if Equipment faults develop.
Fault frequencies can be defined for each measurement point. Up to seven individual fault
frequency descriptions are available for each set. An individual entry may actually define
one or more frequencies depending on the input type that has been selected.
Fault Frequency Information Dialog

Fault Frequency Information Dialog Box

Description - Describes fault frequency.

The Logical Hierarchy

B-25

Type - Select from the following choices of fault types:

XXX
MUL
BRG
Gear
Belt
Harm
Mod
Fix
MTRV
MTRC
ADD
GBOX
RPM
Set

For a description of these fault frequency input types please refer to Fault
Frequency Set Information under Measurement Points in Chapter 3 of the
AMS Machinery Manager manual.
First Modifier - The following table lists the First Modifier functions depending on the
(FF) Input Type shown:

B-26

Input Type

First Modifier Function

MUL

Uses the value specified in this field to multiply the reference


frequency in order to obtain a desired fault frequency.

MOD

Takes the value entered in this field to multiply the frequency


designated in the Component Or Set ID field to attain the desired
harmonic component of the modulation frequency. In most cases, this
value is 1.0, but modulation frequencies occasionally develop at
multiples of a fundamental frequency.

HARM

Uses the value in this field to define the lowest harmonic of interest.

GEAR

This refers to the shaft number.

FIX

Causes this entry to designate the fixed frequency of interest in Hz or


CPM, depending on the definition of the global frequency units in the
database.

ADD

This entry is multiplied by the frequency on the fault frequency line


specified by the Component/Set ID, which is then added (or
subtracted) to the Reference Frequency RPM in order to obtain the
additive frequency.

Second Modifier - For most input types, this field defines the highest harmonic (multiplier) of interest. The program limits the total number of harmonics to 12. The effects
according the Input Type are listed below.

The Logical Hierarchy

B-27

B-28

Input
Type

Second Modifier Function

MUL

Causes this entry to define the highest harmonic of the frequency


calculated by multiplying reference frequency and the first modifier.

BRG

Causes this entry to specify the number of harmonics of the bearing


frequencies (FTF, BSF, BPFO, and BPFI) that are calculated and
displayed. If negative, the absolute value specifies the number of
harmonics; it also specifies that the outer race is rotating and the inner race
is fixed.

GEAR

Causes this entry to designate the number of harmonics of the gearmesh


and shaft speed frequencies that are calculated and displayed.

GBOX

Designates the number of harmonics of the gearbox frequencies.

HARM

Causes this entry to represent the highest harmonic of interest.

FIX

Causes this entry to determine the number of harmonics of the specified


fixed frequency.

MOD

Causes this entry to establish the number of sidebands of interest on each


side of the reference frequency.

ADD

The number of times the additive factor will be added to the Reference
Frequency is as follows:
1st frequency = Ref. Freq + 1 x (Component/Set ID x 1st Modifier)
2nd frequency = Ref. Freq + 2 x (Component/Set ID X 1st Modifier)
nth frequency = Ref. Freq + nth x (Component/Set ID x 1st Modifier)

Component or Set ID - This field performs different functions depending on the Input
Type that has been specified.
Input
Type

Component
or Set ID

Description

BRG

1-1,000,000

Retrieves data from the bearing data set stored in the CSI
Component Warehouse or Users Warehouse under this index
number

RPM

The source of the RPM used in calculations. Identities are as


follows:
1-48

The ID of the measurement point

Current measurement point

-1

Equipment RPM

-2

Any measurement point with a different RPM (-2 should not be


used as the input for GBOX)

GEAR 1-1,000,000

Recalls data from the gear data set stored in the CSI Component
Warehouse or Users Warehouse under this index number

GBOX 1-1,000,000

Recalls data from the gear data set stored in the CSI Component
Warehouse or Users Warehouse under this index number

MOD

0-6

BELT

1-1,000,000

ADD

0-6

Refers to a previously defined fault frequency entry in the same


fault frequency set. The referenced entry represents the
modulating frequency. In the fault frequency set shown at the
beginning of this section, entry 6 shows an Input Type of MOD,
which refers to entry 1 in the component ID as the modulating
frequency. MOD requires that the modulating frequency is a
previously defined entry, or if 0, the turning speed of the piece of
equipment
Retrieves data from the belt data set stored in the CSI Component
Warehouse or Users Warehouse under this index number
Specifies the line number (in the fault frequency list) containing
the frequency used to be multiplied by the First Modifier, which
is then added to (or subtracted from) to the Reference Frequency
RPM to obtain the additive frequency

Reference Frequency - Specifies the frequency that will be used as a reference when performing calculations. Enter a zero (0) to designate the equipment running speed as the reference or enter a fault frequency entry number (1 through 6) that has been previously
defined (reference entry number must be less than the current entry number).

The Logical Hierarchy

B-29

The Reference Frequency also affects these four Input Types in the following manner:
Input Type

Reference Frequency Function

MUL

Multiplies the frequency designated by this number times the first


modifier.

GBOX

Identifies the reference frequency designated by this fault frequency


line number. If, for example, this number referenced a fault frequency
line that also contained a gearbox setup (GBOX or GEAR), it would
identify the output frequency of that gearbox.

HARM

Identifies the frequency designated by this number as the first or


fundamental harmonic frequency.

MOD

Identifies the frequency designated by this number as the fault (carrier)


frequency which is being modulated (sideband frequencies surround
it).

Monitoring Information Tab

Under the measurement point tree location, when the hardware has been attached, there is
a Monitoring Information Tab. Click the Monitoring Information Tab.

Measurement Point - Monitoring Information Tab

B-30

Monitoring Unit (read only)


Abbreviation - abbreviation of 4500 unit
Description - description of 4500 unit
Signal Channel/Sensor
Select
Click the Browse button to display a list of available signal channels on the
4500 unit to attach to this measurement point.
The following fields will be filled in when the sensor is selected:
Sensor Type - signal channel number assigned to point
Description - description of channel assigned to point
Number - type of sensor on the signal channel
Tachometer Channel
Clicking Default removes the assignment of a tach channel to this point so
that it will reference the tachometer chosen at the component level.

The Logical Hierarchy

B-31

Click Browse to select a specific tach to be referenced by this measurement


point and any of its data collection sets.

Tach Selection Dialog

Select the type of tach desired by clicking Physical, Virtual, or Constant, then select the specific tach and click OK.
The following fields will be filled in when a tach is selected:
Type - Physical, Virtual, or Constant
Description - User-defined description of the tach
Number - The channel number of the tachometer on the 4500 unit
Select either Physical, Virtual, or Constant tach by clicking one of the buttons at the top of
the dialog box. Then select the specific tach and click OK.
The following fields will be filled in when the tach is selected:
Type - Physical, Virtual, or Constant
Description - description of the tach
Channel - the channel number for this tach

B-32

Gross Scan Properties

This allows you to configure backup reporting and alarms.


Backup Reporting
Enable Backup Reporting
Backup reporting is enabled if there is a check mark in the box to the left
of Enable backup reporting timer. Click in the box to toggle backup
reporting on and off.
Backup Reporting Interval
If backup reporting is enabled, you can enter a time interval in the Reporting Interval edit
box. This way, data is reported to the watch program at approximately the interval specified. The desired interval is defined by a combination of numbers and letters used to indicate the units of the numbers. The possible letters are (d)ays, (h)ours, (m)inutes and
(s)econds. If no letter is given the number is interpreted as seconds. Some examples of valid
intervals are:
8h

every 8 hours

1d 12h

every 36 hours

10m

every 10 minutes

1h 30m

every 90 minutes

90s

every 1 minute 30 seconds

1m 30s

every 90 seconds

The program will always display the interval in reduced form (for example, 1h 30m instead
of 90m).
Enabling backup reporting must be done individually for each measurement point. Using
Copy and Paste is a good way to create multiple points with the same settings.
Emerson recommends using the GS backup timer, since GS data is collected
more frequently than Block data (Spectrums and Waveforms), and takes up less
hard drive space.

The Logical Hierarchy

B-33

To set all measurement points in the database to have the same Gross Scan
Backup Reporting setup, the right click on the Area folder and select Modify
GS Reporting.
5

If the Timer is enabled, set and Interval. When OK is pressed, all measurement points in the database will have selected Gross Scan Backup Reporting
setup.
In an equipment with many measurement points, there is a convenient way to
edit all the Gross Scan Backup Reporting Intervals for the all the measurement
points in that equipment. Highlight the desired equipment, right click, select
Edit, then select Gross Scan Reporting.

B-34

If the Timer is Enabled, set the Interval. Highlight all the measurement points
desired to have the above setup then press Apply. User can set different setups
for different set of measurement points. Pressing OK is the same as pressing
Apply, only difference is that OK causes the dialog to go away after the
changes are made.
Alarm Limits - Selecting the AC Limits or DC Limits will bring up the dialog for setting
the corresponding limits.
AC Limits: Click AC Limits to set the alarm limits for Gross Scan vibration
(the AC component of the sensors signal).
DC Limits: Click DC Limits to define the DC Limits (the DC component
of the sensors signal).
There are two new alarm types that you can configure within the Gross Scan Alarm limits
page (both AC and DC).

Gross Scan Limits

New Alarm Types


1)Bad Input High: For AC alarms, this is set via the sensors maximum AC input.
For DC alarms, this is set via the sensors maximum DC input.
2)Bad Input Low: For AC alarms, this is set via the sensors minimum AC input. For
DC alarms, this is set via the sensors minimum DC input.
Both Bad Input alarms are automatically activated, and cannot be turned off. The fields that
can be modified are the Limit Value, Hysteresis, Urgency, and Relay annunciation. The
function of this alarm type is to define the minimum and maximum operational limits of
the sensor, and the limits at which the system invalidates related data collection and data
reporting.

The Logical Hierarchy

B-35

B-36

Appendix

Analysis Parameter and Alarm Limit Sets

Analysis Parameter Sets


Analysis parameter sets contain the criteria for acquiring data along with the analysis
parameters to be calculated. Analysis parameter (AP) sets are created using the Online
Config program.
To create an analysis parameter set, expand the tree in the Online Config program, position
the cursor over the analysis set folder, right-click, and select Add AP Set, or select the Analysis Parameter Set folder from the Insert menu and select New Analysis Parameter Set.
This will display the Analysis Parameter Set Properties view containing two tabs.

Data Acquisition Tab


On this screen you will fill in the data acquisition criteria for this AP set.

AP Set View with Data Acquisition Tab

C-1

Following is an explanation of each field on this screen:


Sensor Type - An analysis parameter set is valid for a specific sensor type. Choose from
the following sensor types:

Accelerometer
Velometer
Displacement Probe
AC
Microphone
Current Clamp
Flux Coil

Acquisition Mode - Select either Normal or PeakVue.

AP Set view with PeakVue selected

C-2

If you select PeakVue...

PeakVue Filter - If you selected PeakVue in the Acquisition Mode field, you will need to
select a bandpass or highpass filter in this field.

PeakVue Filter selection field

Note

PeakVue must be enabled in the 4500 hardware before AP Sets can be activated.
PeakVue is used to detect and measure short duration higher frequency waves (i.e. stress
waves) that are created when metal is impacted or relieved of residual stress by cracking.
For example, if a rolling element in a bearing passes over a defect that may still be on the
inner or outer race, the race will deflect and then spring back. This motion creates a stress
wave. PeakVue measures the highest amplitude found in this waveform and holds it as the
highest value during a waveform time length equal to one over the sampling rate.
Bandpass Filters - Generally used when the event of interest is the excitation of a structural resonance or the modulation of known frequencies such as gear mesh. The bandpass filter should be set so that the lower limit
of the filter is greater than or equal to the conventional Fmax of the spectrum.
Highpass Filters - Used to filter out low frequency information for detailed
analysis of high-frequency, low-amplitude data. Generally used when the
objective is to detect waves that are emitted by impacting, fatigue,
cracking, etc. The highpass filter should be set equal to or above the conventional Fmax of the spectrum.

C-3

Note

When using PeakVue, for maximum results in the early detection of bearing
failure, Emerson strongly recommends trending the Waveform Peak Value
parameter.
Type - The analysis may be order based or frequency based.
FMax - If the analysis is frequency based, you must select from a list of valid FMax values.
Enable Order Tracking? - If the order tracking is to be used, check the box beside this
question.
If you select Normal...

Normal- If you selected Normal in the Acquisition Mode field, you will need to select
Type.

AP Set view with Normal selected

C-4

Type - The analysis may be order based or frequency based. If Orders is selected, you will
need to select Number of Orders, from the Number of Orders field that appears.

Type field with Orders selected

If Frequency is selected, you will need to select FMax values from the FMax field that
appears.

Type field with Frequency selected

Enable TSA? - If checked, this enables time synchronous analysis. If checked, a Number
of TSA Averages box appears in which you will need to enter the number of averages
you want.

Enable Order Tracking? - If checked, this enables order tracking.


Number of Lines, Number of Averages, Averaging Mode, Window Type

C-5

Number of Lines - Select a resolution up to 6400 lines.


Number of Averages - Enter the number of spectral averages.
Averaging Mode - Normal averaging mode is all that is currently available.
Window Type - Select from either the Hanning window or no window.

Analysis Parameters Tab


The second component of the AP set consists of its analysis parameters. You can define up
to 24 analysis parameters for each AP set.

AP Set View with Parameter Tab

An analysis parameter set (APS) includes a group of up to 24 individual analysis parameters that divide the frequency spectrum into bands that are individually measured and analyzed. Each frequency band is designed to contain a segment of the spectrum where
specific machinery frequencies occur, such as the 1x turning speed (1xRPM), turning speed
harmonics, bearing frequencies, etc.
Note

Parameters can also be calculated from the time waveform.

C-6

Analysis parameter sets may also contain other non-spectral data such as NxRPM amplitude and phase, etc. (DC offset may be included in the collected transient sets, for instance.)
In addition, each analysis parameter set contains instructions that tell the machinery analyzer how data are to be collected, analyzed, and stored during data collection for each measurement point.
To edit a parameter, select a parameter in the list, and right-click.

AP Definition Dialog

First, select the type of parameter to be calculated. The Model 4500 supports the following
parameters:
Total Energy

The total energy value represents all the energy within a signal.
Units - This choice is only available for vibration sensors. You may select from acceleration, velocity, or displacement. If the units selected are different from the physical sensor,
then a digital integration or differentiation will be performed as needed.
Energy Within a Frequency Range

This value represents the sum of the energy between two specified points of a spectrum.

C-7

Units - This choice is only available for vibration sensors. You may choose from acceleration, velocity, or displacement. If the units selected are different from the physical sensor,
then a digital integration or differentiation will be performed as needed.
Low Point - The low order or frequency point.
High Point - The high order or frequency point.
Synchronous Energy Within a Frequency Range

The energy between two specified points that is an integer-multiple of turning speed will be
summed.
Units - This choice is only available for vibration sensors. You may select from acceleration, velocity, or displacement. If the units selected are different from the physical sensor,
then a digital integration or differentiation will be performed as needed.
Low Point - The low order or frequency point.
High Point - The high order or frequency point.
Non-synchronous Energy Within a Frequency Range

The energy between two specified points that is not an integer-multiple of turning speed
will be summed.
Units - The units for this parameter. This choice is only available for vibration sensors. You
may select acceleration, velocity, or displacement. If the units selected are different from the
physical sensor, then a digital integration or differentiation will be performed as needed.
Low Point - The low order or frequency point.
High Point - The high order or frequency point.
Synchronous Peak

The signal is synchronously sampled to determine the energy at a harmonic of running


speed. This requires a physical tach pulse.
Units - This choice is only available for vibration sensors. You may select from acceleration, velocity, or displacement. If the units selected are different from the physical sensor,
then a digital integration or differentiation will be performed as needed.
Order - The harmonic of running speed.

C-8

Number of Averages - Determines the number of data samples or averages that are collected by the equipment analyzer to perform the FFT calculation. Emerson recommends
four to 10 averages for normal vibration measurement on rotating pieces of equipment.
(Fewer number of averages may be used in areas with a low random noise level.)
Synchronous Phase

The signal is synchronously sampled to determine the phase relative to the tach at a harmonic of running speed. This requires a physical tach pulse.
Order - The harmonic of running speed.
Number of Averages - Determines the number of data samples or averages that are collected by the equipment analyzer to perform the FFT calculation. Emerson recommends
four to 10 averages for normal vibration measurement on rotating pieces of equipment.
(Fewer number of averages may be used in areas with a low random noise level.)
Relative Synchronous Harmonics

The summation of energy of a relative frequency and a number of its harmonics.


Units - This choice is only available for vibration sensors. You may select from acceleration, velocity, or displacement. If the units selected are different from the physical sensor,
then a digital integration or differentiation will be performed as needed.
Relative Frequency - The relative frequency or order.
Harmonics - The number of harmonics of the relative frequency.
Waveform Peak Value

The absolute value of the largest magnitude peak (either in the positive or negative direction) in the time waveform collected for the spectrum.
Units - The units for this parameter must be the same as the signal. For example, an accelerometer without hardware integration requires the units be acceleration, and with hardware integration requires the units be velocity.
Waveform Peak-to-Peak Value

The peak-to-peak measurement of the highest and lowest (most negative) peaks in the time
waveform collected for the spectrum.
Units - The units for this parameter must be the same as the signal. For example, an accelerometer without hardware integration requires the units be acceleration, and with hardware integration requires the units be velocity.

C-9

SMax

The maximum length of the x-y vector.


Units - The units for this parameter must be the same as the signal. For example, an accelerometer without hardware integration requires the units be acceleration, and with hardware integration requires the units be velocity.
Variance of Time Waveform

This is a statistical parameter. Variance is an indication of how much the signal varies from
its mean.
HFD (High Frequency Detection)

Acceleration is the only unit available with the HFD parameter.

C-10

Alarm Limit Sets


An analysis parameter set may have a number of alarm limit sets associated with it.
To create an alarm limit set, position the cursor over the analysis parameter set that it corresponds to, right-click, and select Add Limit Set, or highlight the analysis parameter set and
select New Limit Set from the Insert pull down menu.

Alarm Limit Set View

Alarm Limit Sets

C-11

At the top of this view is the list of parameters and at the bottom of the view is the limit list.
Each parameter may have 6 limits defined.
HighHigh

This alarm is equivalent to RBMs increasing D alarm.

High

This alarm is equivalent to RBMs increasing C alarm.

OK

Returned to Normal.

Low

This alarm is equivalent to RBMs decreasing C alarm.

LowLow

This alarm is equivalent to RBMs decreasing D alarm.

Rate-ofThis alarm is equivalent to an instantaneous derivative of the percent


Change (ROC) change an analysis parameter or gross scan undergoes from the
previous scan to the current scan. It is calculated by asking the user the
maximum percent change a parameter can change in a given amount of
time.
Absolute
Epsilon

The absolute value of the difference between last value and the current
value cannot be greater than or equal to the value entered.

Each limit is composed of the following fields:


Active Flag - This allows alarms to be turned on and off as desired.
Value - The actual value of the limit.
Hysteresis - This value is applied when any parameter that is currently in an alarm state
can change to a normal or lesser alarm state. The purpose of the hysteresis is to prevent a
change of state when the parameter value is hovering around that alarm level. This value is
not applicable for Rate-of-Change and Absolute Epsilon limits.
Urgency - This is the level of urgency given to a limit.
Note

The OK alarm type allows a relay assignment for the normal condition.
This is the range of amplitude between the configured alarm limits. This
alarm is always active.

C-12

To set a limit for the parameter, select the parameter of interest in the top list by clicking on
the parameter. The bottom list is context sensitive to the top list showing the limits for the
selected parameter. To modify a limit, select the limit of interest and right-click.

Limit Definition Dialog

Enter the information and click OK to accept.

Alarm Limit Sets

C-13

Multiple selection is also available on these lists. For example, the High-High limit may be
set to the same value for multiple parameters. Multiple selection is accomplished by
selecting one parameter then holding down the Ctrl key and selecting additional parameters. When a limit is modified, any changes made apply to all selected parameters. The limit
list also allows multiple selection and any changes made would apply to all selected limits.

Multiple Selection of Limits

C-14

For example, all limits may be activated by selecting all limits, and setting the active flag to
Yes. If this is the only change, all will be activated without affecting any other value in the
limit.

Alarm Limit Sets

C-15

Phase Alarm Limits


Phase alarming is a delta based alarm scheme. What this means is that alarm windows
are calculated about a user specified reference phase value based on delta values set at the
time of alarm limit set creation. The following diagram illustrates a phase alarm parameter
with a High delta and a High High delta of 30 degrees and 90 degrees, respectively.

The delta values are used to calculate alarm "windows" on either side of the phase reference
value. Assuming a phase reference value of zero degrees as shown set below,

C-16

the alarm windows are calculated by adding and subtracting the deltas to and from the reference phase value. This gives an alarm window on either side of the reference. For
example we would calculate the window above the reference value by adding the High
and High High deltas to the reference value. This would give us values of
0 + 30 = 30
and
0 + 90 = 90.
For the window below the reference value we subtract the deltas from the reference
yielding
0 - 30 = -30
and
0 - 90 = -90.
Since the window values below the reference are negative they are normalized to 360
degrees which gives us values of 330 and 270, respectively. These calculations give us a
"Normal" window from 330 degrees to 30 degrees, two High alarm windows: 30 to 90
degrees and 270 to 330 degrees and a High High alarm window of 90 to 270 degrees. This
is represented graphically by the figure below.

Alarm Limit Sets

C-17

The measured phase readings are also normalized to 360 degrees by the software, so actual
readings will conform to the alarming scheme. In the scenario set up here, measured phase
readings of 0 to 30 degrees or 330 to 360 degrees would indicate that our equipment was
operating in the Normal range. Measured phase readings of 30 to 90 degrees or 270 to 330
degrees would constitute operation in a High alarm state and readings between 90 and 270
degrees would indicate a state of High High alarm. The following diagram illustrates what
this would look like from O_Watch.

Inspection of the tool tip window reveals the alarming windows we calculated earlier and
the alarm bar display gives us a linear representation of the circular view we looked at earlier.
The setting of the Phase Reference value is done on a per Data Collection Set basis. For
details, see Data Collection Sets on page D-1.

C-18

Appendix

Data Collection Sets

Introduction
A data collection set (DCS) is a part of the Online database that defines the following
parameters:
when to collect data
what data to collect
how to analyze the data
what data to report
when to report data
Each measurement point on a component can have up to 128 data collection sets.

D-1

Adding a Data Collection Set

Tree View - Measurement Point Context Menu

To add a Data Collection Set, position the cursor over the desired measurement point, rightclick, and select Add DCS, or highlight the measurement point and select New DCS from
the Insert menu.

D-2

There is a 32-character description field for identifying the DCS.

DCS View - Properties

First, select an analysis parameter set by clicking Select. This set must be valid for the type
of sensor associated with the measurement point. Only valid AP sets will be displayed.

AP Set Selection Dialog

Adding a Data Collection Set

D-3

Once an analysis parameter set has been selected, select from a list of alarm limit sets associated with the selected analysis parameter set.

AL Set Selection Dialog

The analysis parameter set defines how to collect the data (fmax, number of lines, etc.) and
which parameters to collect. The alarm limit set defines the operating range, and what constitutes an alarm or exception, and the urgency associated with that exception.

D-4

Alarm and Reporting Control

The alarm control mechanism allows the user to specify at the AP level how and if each
limit will be enunciated, and how block data (spectra and waveform) will be reported.

Alarm and Reporting Control Dialog

Select a parameter from the upper list. The active limits for that parameter will be displayed
in the lower list. Select a limit and right-click. The fields to be set are as follows:
Relay - the digital output channel number
Enunciation - (output relay control) indicates when to enunciate
Always - any time an exception occurs
Never - do not ever enunciate
Track Report - follow the reporting threshold for that parameter.
Block Data - indicates when to report block data.
Always - any time an exception occurs

Adding a Data Collection Set

D-5

Never - do not ever report


Track Report - follow the reporting threshold for that parameter
Reporting Threshold

The reporting threshold for a parameter establishes the minimum urgency associated with
an exception before parameter values are reported. This would also be true for enunciation
and block data when they are set to Track Report.
Backup Timer

To activate the backup timer, check Enable, then enter the interval in seconds. This timer
applies to parameter data. If parameter data have not been reported when this timer expires,
then report data. The exception to this is if the DCS is predicate-based (see Predicate discussion below) and the predicate is not true, then data will not be reported.
Block Data - There is a backup timer specifically for block data. To set this backup timer,
check Enable, then enter the interval in seconds. This timer works slightly differently than
the timer for parameter data. If the timer expires then it will set a flag to indicate that the next
time block data is collected it should be reported. It does not force a collection.
The types of block data are spectrum and waveform. Check either one or both as the block
data to be reported and stored in the database.
You can also set the number of spectra (waveforms) to be stored in the database. The maximum number is 250 and the minimum is 100. The replacement scheme is first in, first out.
Marked spectra or waveforms are always retained.

D-6

There is a convenient way to edit the AP Data Backup Timer, Block Data Backup Timer
and Collection Scheduling Interval for all the DCSs for all the measurement points in an
Equipment. Highlight the desired equipment, right click, select Edit, the select DCS
Data Reporting.

First select whether editing Predicate based or Timer based DCSs. Then setup the AP,
Block Data, and Collection Intervals. Highlight the DCSs desired to have the above settings
and press Apply. User can now set up a different set of values for different DCSs. OK
has the same effect as Apply except the dialog goes away after the changes are made.

Adding a Data Collection Set

D-7

Collection Tab
In addition to how and what data is collected, the DCS sets when data should be collected.
Data collection may either be time based or predicate based.
Time Based Collection

Check Timer, then enter the interval in seconds for data collection. Gross scan data is collected continually, this field applies only to parameter and block data.
Note

If a predicate had been selected, the reference to that predicate is deleted by


checking Timer.
Predicate Based Collection

Check Predicate then click Select. This will display a list of predicates defined for the 4500
Unit monitoring the component to which this DCS belongs.

Predicate Selection Dialog

D-8

Select the desired predicate and click OK.

Adding a Data Collection Set

D-9

Tachometer
Clicking Default removes the assignment of a tach channel to this DCS so that it will reference the tachometer chosen at the measurement point level.
Click Select to select a specific tach to be referenced by this data collection set.

Tach Selection Dialog

Select the type of tach desired by clicking Physical, Virtual, or Constant, then select the specific tach and click OK.
The following fields will be filled in when a tach is selected:
Type - Physical, Virtual, or Constant
Channel Number - The tachs channel number on the 4500 unit.
Description - User-defined description of the tach.

D-10

Phase References Tab


2

Phase References could be set Manually or On First Reading. If the


user selects Manually, then the user can change the Phase References
manually, by selecting the desired parameter and right clicking. If the user
selects On first Reading, then the first reported phase readings will be set
to be the reference.
If the Reference Set Method is On First Reading and the references are
already set, but the user wants to clear these values and use the Next First
Reading, then the user can press the Re-Arm All References button.
This will remove all references and set the system to use the next collected
values as the reference.
If the Reference Set Method is Manual and there are more than 1 phase
parameter, then either all must be set, or all must not be set.

Adding a Data Collection Set

D-11

Activate / Deactivate DCS

There is a convenient way to activate DCSs for all the measurement points in an Equipment. Highlight the desired equipment, right click, select Activate/Deactivate DCSs.
Check all the DCSs desired to be activated, and uncheck the DCSs desired to be deactivated, and then press OK.

D-12

Validation of DCS
A DCS may not be activated if one of the following is true:
1. . . . Measurement Point is not associated with a signal channel
2. . . . Signal channel is not active or not commissioned.
3. . . . DCS has no AP set associated
4. . . . Signal channel has no sensor associated
5. . . . If DCS is predicate based and there is no collection predicate associated
6. . . . If setup is not valid for APs to collect
a. AP signal type must match signal type of signal channel definition
b. Something is wrong with the AP set itself
i Something is wrong with the AP limits
ii The units requested for waveform parameters and HFD must
match sensor
iii Sync Pk and Phase must be requested in pairs w/ first parameter of
pair being the Sync Pk
iv The settings (order & # avgs) for sync Pk and Sync Phase pair must
be the same
c.Order based requires a tachometer association
d.Order based requires orders to be > 0
e.Sync Phase parameters requires a tachometer association
f.Sync Pk requires a physical tach
If a tach is referenced, it must be active and commissioned
7.. . . If there are phase parameters in the selected AP set, then:
a.The Collection Scheduling must be predicate based.
b.A Physical Tachometer must be associated.
c.The tachometer channel may not be software or hardware
divided.

Adding a Data Collection Set

D-13

d. If the phase reference set method is On first Reading, and


the phase references have not been set, then a backup
reporting timer for AP data must be set.

D-14

Appendix

Predicates

Introduction
Predicates are a flexible way to collect and analyze data precisely when and how you want
even when the machinery conditions change.
A predicate dictates when data is to be collected. Predicates only apply to data that is collected by exception.
Multiple collection requests are created in Online Config and assigned to 4500 units. Each
collection request may be controlled by a predicate. Technically a predicate is simply an
assertion that certain conditions are true. The 4500 firmware is constantly checking the
predicates that have been downloaded to it from the database. When the assertion evaluates
as true then any collection requests associated with it are scheduled for collection by the
DSP.
By using predicates that incorporate digital input relays, you can prevent collection of bad
data when the equipment isnt really turned on or isnt under load. Or perhaps you need to
make some special acquisitions when the equipment is idle and have a relay to let you know
when that occurs.
By using predicates based on speed you can choose to collect spectral data with different
resolutions, depending on how fast the machinery is operating. This allows you to focus
higher resolution acquisitions, which take longer to acquire, during times when it is most
appropriate. You can also use predicates to assign different alarm levels to collections which
occur under certain conditions to make allowance for higher vibration levels during those
times.
You can combine these types of collection control. For instance, you could take one type of
acquisition when the equipment is at a certain speed but the relay controlling a valve is
closed, and then take another collection when the equipment is at the same speed but the
relay is open, signaling a change in loading.
In addition to input relays and speed you can incorporate the AC or DC readings from
signal channels. This allows you to base collections on current vibration levels, bias voltage,
or process values like temperature.

E-1

Each of these items may be combined to produce arbitrary expressions to provide very
sophisticated control of carefully focused data collection.

E-2

Using Predicates
The following table lists the elements that belong to a predicate: input, conditions, comparisons, and Boolean logic:

INPUT

CONDITION

COMPARISON

Gross Scan Value

<,<=,>,>=,=,!=

Constant

Tach

<,<=,>,>=,=,!=

RPM

Digital Input

On/Off

Inputs
Gross Scan - Current gross scan value is compared to a constant value.
Digital Input - Is either on or off.
Tach Value - The selected tachometer value is compared to the user-defined RPM range.

Condition

Using Predicates

<

Input is less than associated comparison value.

<=

Input is less than or equal to comparison value.

>

Input is greater than comparison value.

>=

Input is greater than or equal to comparison value.

Input is equal to comparison value.

!=

Input is not equal to comparison value.

E-3

Comparison
RPM - A user-defined value that is compared to the tachometer.
Constant - A user-defined sensor value to be compared to the current reading.

Boolean Logic
A predicate can consist of combinations of expressions that allow multiple conditions to be
defined by the user with AND, OR, XOR, or NOT.

Evaluating Predicate
A predicate expression consists of clauses. A clause is made up of inputs that are compared
to values. A clause will evaluate to true or false. Boolean logic can be used to tie multiple
clauses together into an expression.
An expression will also evaluate to true or false based on the rules of Boolean logic. An
evaluation of true means that data should be collected. An evaluation of false means that
data should not be collected.

E-4

Creating Predicates
There are three kinds of predicates: Collection, Trip, and Thrust.
Collection Predicates are constructed based on Gross Scan values, Tachs, Relays, and
other predicates.
Trip Predicates are constructed based on Gross Scan AC channel (Dynamic Vibration
Measurement), typically by displacement (X/Y) probes or velocity probes.
Thrust Predicates are based on Gross Scan DC channel (Static Process Measurement),
typically by displacement probes arranged in the axial direction and configured to provide
shaft position.

Standard Predicates
To create a standard predicate:

Right-click on the predicates folder to get the popup menu.

Expand the tree under the 4500 to show the Predicates folder.
Right-click on the Predicates folder.
Choose Add Collection Predicate from the three options that appear in the popup
menu.

Creating Predicates

E-5

Standard Predicate View

The first field is the name, which is a 16-character name to identify the predicate. This name
can consist of letters, digits, and underscores. It can not contain any spaces and it must begin
with an alpha character. The next field is the Expression, which is read only, and is built by
selecting other buttons or boxes in the view.
Operations

Operations are the Boolean logic operators, and grouping parentheses used to combine
clauses into an expression. Gross Scan, Tach, Relay, and Predicates are how clauses are
built. Only valid actions are active; invalid actions are grayed out. The validity of an action
is based on the current expression.
Clauses

Gross Scan - To build a clause based on a DC or AC gross scan value, click on the channel
of interest to select it.

E-6

Select the desired comparison and fill in the value(s) for the comparison and click OK.
Notice that a clause has been added to the expression.

Gross Scan Clause Dialog Box

Tach - To build a clause based on a tachometer reading, click on a physical tach channel or
a virtual tach channel to select it.

Creating Predicates

E-7

Select the desired comparison, then fill in the speed(s) for the comparison and click OK.
Notice that a clause has been added to the expression.

Tach Clause Dialog

Relay - To build a relay clause, select the input channel by clicking on it. Notice that a
clause has been added to the expression.
Removing a Clause

A clause may be removed from the expression by clicking the backward facing arrow by
the expression.

E-8

Trip Predicates
Trip Predicates were created to provide Failsafe Shutdown of machinery when unsafe
conditions are detected. There are two types of Trip Predicates supported by the CSI 4500:
Radial and Thrust (axial). Radial Trip Predicates monitor radial vibration (GS AC) at the
machine bearings and use Relay Voting Logic to shutdown machines if vibration
exceeds specified levels. Thrust Trip Predicates monitor axial shaft position (GS DC) and
shutdown machines if movement exceeds the specified levels. Trip Predicates are most frequently used in TURBO machinery monitoring.
Each Trip Predicate can be configured to drive a single output shutdown relay when the trip
conditions are met. Each Trip Predicate may drive a separate relay, and multiple Trip Predicates can be configured to use the same relay. If more than one Trip Predicate uses a single
relay, the relay is activated if ANY of the Trip Predicates votes to TRIP. Note that when a
relay has been attached to a Trip Predicate, it is removed from the list for output relays on
alarm definition dialogs (to prevent you from making mistakes).
To prevent false trips, the activation of the relay can be delayed with the configurable Trip
Time Delay of 0-10 seconds. [Default setting is zero (0) seconds.] When a delay is specified, the output shutdown relay will only be activated if the trip condition is continuously
met throughout the delay period.
For the purposes of Trip Predicate logic, a sensor is considered Bad if (1) it produces Questionable data (a measurement that exceeds a Bad Input High or Bad Input Low limit),
(2) its associated signal channel failed Power On Self Test or (3) it is in Hardware Over
Range.
Note

Trip Predicates use commissioned relay channels. Therefore, you cannot


create Trip Predicates from a database template (.cvb file).

Creating Predicates

E-9

Radial Trip Predicates


To create a radial trip predicate:

Expand the tree under the CSI 4500 to show the Predicates folder
Right-click on the Predicates folder.
Choose Add Radial Trip Predicate from the three options that appear in the popup
menu.
Trip Time Delay. Select whole numbers between 0 and 10 seconds. This delay
allows the CSI 4500 to monitor the event tripping the predicate to make sure it is a
continuous event before notifying you.
Trip on ALL Bad Sensors on the Primary Bearing. If checked (Predicate will be
True), this means you will receive a warning message if the CSI 4500 detects that
all the sensors monitoring a bearing are not functioning. If not selected, the CSI
4500 will alert you when even one sensor is not functioning normally.

Radial Trip Predicate View

E-10

First, you need to name the predicate. In this example, we will use a Motor/Pump unit with
1 coupling and 4 bearings.

A motor/pump with one coupling and four bearings.

A Radial Trip Predicate is concerned with vibration in one primary bearing, but may be
configured to also consider vibration in up to two additional adjacent bearings. Bearings
may be fitted with one, two or three sensors each, but the number of sensors per bearing
must be the same for all bearings used in a given Radial Trip Predicate.
How Radial Trip Predicates respond to Bad and Disabled sensors is controlled by the selection or de-selection of the Trip on ALL bad Sensors on the Primary Bearing check box.
This behavior is discussed in the next section.
For our example, we have four bearings with three sensors per bearing. An important rule
to remember in all applications is that every bearing is considered a primary bearing, and
there can be one or two adjacent bearings for each primary bearing.
Determining Number of Bearings:

One Bearing Trip Predicates: have only one primary bearing and no adjacent bearings.
Two Bearing Trip Predicates: have one primary bearing and one adjacent bearing.
Three Bearing Trip Predicates: have one primary bearing and two adjacent bearings.
Radial Trip Predicate Logic

One Bearing Radial Trip Predicate


The trip logic rules differ between one, two and three sensor per bearing configurations.
One Sensor per bearing
The sensor being in HighHigh or LowLow alarm will cause a TRIP
The sensor being Bad or Disabled when the Trip on ALL bad Sensors on the Primary Bearing check box is checked will cause a TRIP.

Creating Predicates

E-11

Two Sensors per bearing


Both sensors being in HighHigh or LowLow alarm will cause a TRIP
One sensor being in HighHigh or LowLow and the other sensor being Bad or
Disabled will cause a TRIP.
Bad or Disabled sensors are exempt from voting
Special Case: Both sensors being Bad or Disabled when the Trip on ALL bad Sensors on the Primary Bearing check box is checked will cause a TRIP
Three Sensors per bearing
Two or three sensors being in HighHigh or LowLow alarm will cause a TRIP
One or more sensors being in HighHigh or LowLow while one or more other
sensors in High or Low alarm will cause a TRIP
One sensor being in HighHigh or LowLow while the other two sensors are
Bad or Disabled will cause a TRIP
Bad or Disabled sensors are exempt from voting
Special Case: All three sensors being Bad or Disabled when the Trip on ALL bad
Sensors on the Primary Bearing check box is checked will cause a TRIP.
Two and Three Bearing Radial Trip Predicate

Every bearing used as an adjacent bearing in a Radial Trip Predicate must also be used as a
primary bearing in another Radial Trip Predicate. Therefore the One Bearing Radial Trip
Predicate rules in the above section apply to every bearing. For two and three bearing
Radial Trip Predicates (i.e., one or two adjacent bearings are configured) the following
additional rules apply.
One or more sensors on the Primary Bearing being in HighHigh or LowLow
while one or more sensors from an adjacent bearing being in High, Low,
HighHigh, or LowLow will cause a TRIP
Bad and Disabled sensors on the adjacent bearings are always exempt from voting.
In our Motor/Pump example diagram, a two bearing or a two and three bearing trip logic
could be implemented. Both examples are explained below:
Example: Two Bearing Radial Trip Predicate

If you were to split the piece of equipment into two components, beginning with the motor,
this creates two sets or bearings, (two for the motor and two for the pump).

E-12

Trip Predicate 1: Bearing 1 would be Primary and Bearing 2 would be the adjacent
bearing (output relay 1).

In this graphic, Bearing 1 is the primary bearing.

Radial Trip Predicate 2: Bearing 2 would be the Primary and Bearing 1 would be the
adjacent (output relay 2).

In this graphic, Bearing 2 is the primary bearing.

Radial Trip Predicate 3: Bearing 3 would be the Primary and Bearing 4 would be the adjacently bearing (output relay 3).
Radial Trip Predicate 4: Bearing 4 would be the Primary and Bearing 3 would be the adjacent bearing (output relay 4).

Creating Predicates

E-13

Example: Combination Two and Three Bearing Trip Predicate

In this predicate example, splitting the equipment up into components is less effective. So
we are going to approach this from a machine train perspective and base it on adjacent
bearing location.

A machine train perspective.

Radial Trip Predicate 1: (Two Bearing Predicate): (has one adjacent bearing) Bearing 1
would be the Primary and bearing 2 would be the adjacent bearing (output relay 1).
Radial Trip Predicate 2: (Three Bearing Predicate): (has two adjacent bearings): Bearing
2 would be Primary. Bearing 1 and 3 would be the adjacent bearings (output relay 2).
Radial Trip Predicate 3: (Three Bearing Predicate): (has two adjacent bearings): Bearing
3would be primary; Bearing 2 and 4 would be the adjacent bearings (output relay 2).

E-14

Radial Trip Predicate 4: (Two Bearing Predicate): (has one adjacent bearing): Bearing 4
would be Primary and bearing 3 would be the adjacent bearing (output relay 4).

Radial Trip Predicate Properties

You may have noticed the 1-to-1 relationship between Radial Trip predicates and the
number of bearings that are monitored in each example. This should always be the case and
is easy to check. This provides a means of verifying that every bearing in the equipment
train is configured as a primary bearing in a trip predicate. The software does not allow the
definition of a trip predicate twice with he same primary bearing sensors.
Note

No alarm limits are defined here. We are simply coupling the GS channels
to the predicate, and their existing limit settings are used for alarm evaluation.

Creating Predicates

E-15

Thrust Trip Predicates


To create a Thrust Trip Predicate:

Expand the tree under the CSI 4500 to show the Predicate folder.
Right-click on the Predicate folder.
Choose Add Thrust Predicate from the popup menu.
A single relay channel must be available. Two Thrust probes that were previously defined
and commissioned on the 4500 unit will be available for selection.
Note

You must define two points (thrust probes are defined as DC sensors) per
thrust predicate. They can only be process points, not vibration points.
To Trip

Trip if one sensor is HighHigh or LowLow and the other sensor is HighHigh, LowLow or is Bad or Disabled
Trip if both sensors Bad or Disabled

Thrust Trip Predicate Properties

E-16

Trip Time Delay. Select whole numbers between 0 and 10 seconds. This delay
allows the CSI 4500 to monitor the event tripping the predicate to make sure it is a
continuous event before notifying you.
Note

Multiple trip predicates can now use the same output relays.

Creating Predicates

E-17

E-18

Appendix

Commissioning

Introduction
Commissioning refers to a validation of the data being acquired on a signal or tach channel.
Online Config must be connected to an Online Server before Commissioning can proceed.
For more information on how to connect to an Online Server, see Step 5 - Connect to an
Oline Server on page 2-7.
A channel must be commissioned before routine data can be collected. The steps for commissioning a signal channel are as follows.

F-1

Vibration Signal Channel Commissioning


Commissioning a vibration signal channel involves performing a demand acquisition of a
spectrum, waveform, and analysis parameters (optional) to validate the data being received.
Prior to commissioning, you might want to see the gross scan values for that channel.

F-2

To view live gross scan data, position the cursor over the pins of the channel on the CSI
4500 front panel configuration screen. This will display the Gross Scan RMS and DC
values for this channel. If these values are as expected, then proceed with the commissioning process.

CSI 4500 Configuration Screen - Live Data Tool Tip

CSI 4500S Configuration Screen - Live Data Tool Tip

Vibration Signal Channel Commissioning

F-3

Position the cursor over the signal channel to be commissioned, right-click, and select
Commission from the Context menu.

Example of CSI 4500 Configuration Screen - Signal Channel Context Menu

Example of CSI 4500S Configuration Screen - Signal Channel Context Menu

F-4

Note

If Commission is grayed out, this means that the connection to the server has
not been established or the unit is currently unavailable.

Acquisition Definition Tab


The first step is to define how the data should be collected. The acquisition definition consists of the acquisition mode, an analysis parameter set, and an optional tachometer.

Commissioning Dialog - Acquisition Definition Tab

In the Acquisition Mode field, select either Normal or PeakVue. For more information on
PeakVue and PeakVue filters, see on page C-1.

Vibration Signal Channel Commissioning

F-5

You can select an existing analysis parameter set to use as a template by clicking next to the
description field.

AP Set Selection Dialog

Select the desired analysis parameter set and click OK. Otherwise fill in the required fields
on the Acquisition Definition tab. For an explanation of the individual fields refer to on
page C-1.

F-6

If the defined acquisition requires a tachometer click the Physical button to display a list of
defined tachometers.

Tach Selection Dialog

Select the desired tachometer and click OK. If the defined acquisition requires a physical or
virtual tachometer and none have been defined, then the acquisition cannot be performed.

Vibration Signal Channel Commissioning

F-7

Channel Setup Tab

Commissioning Dialog - Channel Setup Tab

Commissioning may be an iterative process. The channel setup page will show the channel
that was originally defined, but the user may modify these settings. For an explanation of
the channel settings see Creating and Configuring Hardware on page A - 1. Upon commissioning, the channel definition will be updated to reflect the settings chosen in the commissioning process.

F-8

Data Plots
When the setup has been completed, click Acquire. The request is sent to the server. When
the server has acknowledged receiving the request, a message will be displayed indicating
that the CSI 4500 is acquiring the data.

Data Dialog

The spectral and waveform plots are displayed. Most plotting functions can be accessed by
right-clicking over the plot. Right-click over the center of the plot to display a menu of plotting options. Right-click over the Y-axis to display a menu of options relating to the vertical
scale. Right-click over the X-axis to display a menu of options relating to the horizontal
scale. For complete information on these menus and options, please see Plot Control User
Interface Functions on page G - 1.
The zoom cursor is only available by clicking Zoom. This toggles the cursor between
normal and zoom.

Vibration Signal Channel Commissioning

F-9

View Parameters
The calculated values of the requested analysis parameters, if any, can be viewed by
clicking the View Parameters button.

Analysis Parameters

F-10

If the spectrum, waveform, and parameters are as expected, click the Commission button.
If analysis parameters were acquired then upon commissioning, you will be able to create
an alarm limit set based on the values acquired. This alarm limit set will be associated with
the analysis parameter set used in the acquisition. If it was not an existing analysis parameter set, a new one will be automatically created.

Alarm Limit Dialog

You will have a chance to modify the limits before they are created. Please refer to Alarm
Limit Sets on page C - 11 for details on alarm limits. Once the limits are acceptable, click
OK to create the set or Cancel to abort the operation.
After the channel has been commissioned, its LED will be lit up. Now that a channel has
been commissioned, routine data collection can begin. Please see on page D-1 for more
information on routine data collection.

Vibration Signal Channel Commissioning

F-11

Process Signal Channel Commissioning


To commission a process channel, first verify that the gross scan value being sent from the
box is as expected.
To view the gross scan value of a process channel, position the cursor over the pins of a
channel on the CSI 4500 front pane configuration screen.

CSI 4500 Configuration Screen - Live Data Tool Tip

This will display live updates from the CSI 4500. If these values are as expected, position
the cursor over the signal channel to be commissioned, right-click, and select Commission.
This will set the state of the channel to be commissioned. Once the channel has been commissioned, its LED will be lit up.
Note

If Commission is grayed out, this means that the connection to the server has
not been established or the unit is currently unavailable.

F-12

Tach Channel Commissioning


Commissioning a tach channel involves performing a demand acquisition of a tach waveform with tach pulses to validate that the tach is triggering correctly. Prior to commissioning, the user may want to see RPM values for that channel.

Tach Channel Commissioning

F-13

To view live RPM data, position the cursor over the pins of the channel on the CSI 4500
front panel configuration screen.

CSI 4500 Configuration Screen - Live Data tool Tip

CSI 4500S Configuration Screen - Live Data tool Tip

F-14

Position the cursor over the tach channel to be commissioned, right-click, and select Commission. This will display the Tachometer Waveform Acquisition screen.

CSI 4500 Configuration Screen - Tach Channel Context Menu

CSI 4500S Configuration Screen - Live Data tool Tip

Tach Channel Commissioning

F-15

Note

If Commission is grayed out means the connection to the server has not been
established or the unit is currently unavailable.

Tach Commissioning Dialog

The channel setup page will show how the channel was originally defined, but the user may
modify these settings. For an explanation of the channel settings see on page B-1. Upon
commissioning the channel definition will be updated to reflect the settings chosen in the
commissioning process.

F-16

In addition to the channel setup the user needs to define the FMax and number of lines for
the tach waveform. To acquire the waveform, click Acquire. The request is sent to the
server. When the server has acknowledged receiving the request a message will be displayed indicating that the CSI 4500 is acquiring the data.

Tach Waveform Data Plot

Most plotting functions can be accessed by right-clicking over the plot. Right-click over the
center of the plot to display a menu of plotting options. Right-click over the Y-axis to display a menu of options relating to the vertical axis, and right-click over the X-axis to display
a menu to display a menu of options relating to the horizontal axis. These menus and
options are detailed in Appendix G Plot Control User Interface Functions.
The zoom cursor is only available by clicking Zoom. This toggles the cursor between
normal and zoom.
If the tach is triggering correctly, click Commission and this will update the channel setup
as necessary. Once the channel has been commissioned its LED will light up.

Tach Channel Commissioning

F-17

Continuous Tach Monitoring

The CSI 4500 has the option to continuous monitor the tach signal and display that tach
reading in graphic form. In the Tach Commissioning Dialog, place a check mark in the box
beside Continuous.

Once you select Continuous, the Stop button becomes active and the Acquire button
becomes inactive. This remains true until you click on the Stop button.

F-18

Continuous Tach Graphic Screen

In Continuous Tach mode, the Commission button is not active and does not appear.

Tach Channel Commissioning

F-19

Digital I/O Channel Commissioning


To commission a digital I/O channel the user simply needs to verify that the state of the
channel being sent from the box is as expected.

CSI 4500 Configuration Screen - Live Data Tool Tip

F-20

CSI 4500S Configuration Screen - Live Data tool Tip

To view the state of a digital I/O channel, simply position the cursor over the pins of channel
on the CSI 4500 front panel configuration screen.
This will display live updates from the CSI 4500. If these values are as expected, place the
cursor over the digital I/O channel to be commissioned, right-click, and select Commission.
This will set the state of the channel to be commissioned. Once the channel has been commissioned its LED will be lit up.
Note

The connection to the server has not been established, or the unit is currently
unavailable if the Commission command is dimmed or shaded.

Digital I/O Channel Commissioning

F-21

Commissioning the Transient Subsystem


In addition to commissioning the standard online signals, the CSI 4500 requires the transient subsystem to be commissioned as well.
This step involves identifying which channels acquire transient data. Once accomplished,
the transient daughter card acquires a time waveform for each identified signal and tachometer channel, and the user has the option to commission the unit.
Before transient commissioning can take place, the database hierarchy must be created.
The online tachometer and signal channels must also be commissioned for online acquisition.
The database hierarchy must contain a Measurement Point for each channel for which transient scanning is enabled.
The measurement points provide the mapping of transient signal-channel to transient
tachometer.
The only channels eligible for transient commissioning are those that have a Measurement
Point defined.
The tachometer assigned must be a transient tachometer.
The CSI 4500 supports four transient tachometer channels. The transient-eligible tachometers are the last four channels (13, 14, 15, and 16) on the tachometer card.
The transient subsystem may be commissioned only after the user creates a database hierarchy and defines and commissions the signal and tachometer channels.

F-22

Use the right click menu option available from the unit node of the tree to accomplish this.

Commission Transient Channels using right click on unit

Commission transient scanning through the commissioning dialog box.


A transient commissioning acquisition is then performed, and the time waveforms for each
signal channel display. Tach markers from the associated transient tachometers overlay the
time waveforms. When the commissioning acquisition is accepted, the read only Transient flag is set in the signal and tachometer channel definitions, as well as the unit properties dialog.

Digital I/O Channel Commissioning

F-23

Decommissioning and Re-Commissioning

Changes to a transient channel require the channel to be decommissioned.

Right click the tach and clear the Commission command to decommission

When this occurs, the user is informed with a message stating that any transient data currently stored on the CSI 4500 hard drive will be lost when the new configuration is downloaded to the system.

Warning!

If you are using a transient system and acquiring transient data, decommissioning any signal or tach channel that is currently acquiring transient data
will invalidate the data that is on the hard drive and will cause the transient
sub-system to recreate those files. Data will be lost.

F-24

This message displays prior to the channel loosing its commissioned status in order to allow
the user to abort the operation and keep the hard drives data intact.

Data loss occurs if yes is selected. Use care.

Digital I/O Channel Commissioning

F-25

Activation of Transient Signal Channel

Users have to be able to identify which signal channels are active in the transient scan.
The channels and tachometer setup for Transient will be indicated by the letter T shown
for the unit.

Letter T designated channels and tachs set up for transient

F-26

Commissioned channels can also be seen from the measurement point level from the tree

Digital I/O Channel Commissioning

F-27

F-28

Appendix

Plot Control User Interface Functions

This appendix provides an overview of the functions performed internally by the Plot Control in response to the users commands. Some functions can be accessed directly by a hot
key. The hot keys are shown in bold italics within square brackets. A list of all hot keys with
abbreviated descriptions is shown in the table at the end of this appendix.

Right-Click in Plot Graph Region [Alt+F3]


Right-clicking within the graph region (within x, y-axis boundaries) of an active plot displays a list of Graph Options. Some of these options may be grayed depending on the type
and current state of the plot.

Graph Options Context Menu

G-1

Machinery Health Management - A suggested flow for setup

Create online system .cvb and .rbm using the O_Config application and database
attachment to the Online server (O_Server)
After creating a .cvb using the O_Config application, perform the Unit Configuration
Define the Signal Channel with sensor configuration and commissioning
Define the Tach Channel with commissioning
Define DIO Channel with commissioning
Define: Areas and Equipment types
Create Measurement points
Create Analysis Parameter sets for use with Data Collection Sets (DCS) on measurement point
Create Alarm Limit sets for use with Data Collection Sets (DCS). Optional step,
needs to be performed after system has collected data)
Define Predicate(s) (Physical -to be configured at the point of DCS creation using
the O_Config application.)
Create Data Collection Sets (DCS) and activate them for measurement points
Serialize database and modify with Start/Stop collections using RBMadmin application
Create a backup reporting scheme for historical reference for analyzing data
Use the O_Watch application to monitor the commissioned system collecting data
Implement created Alarm Limit sets on Data collection sets using the O_Config
application
Customize Alarm Limit set using the O_Watch application
Analyze data the 4500 system has stored with the Diagnostic Plotting application
Type of Plot

G-2

Spectrum
Time Waveform
Time Trend

Set Mark [Ctrl+M] - Sets a mark at the current cursor location. The RHS legend box will
display difference information when the cursor is moved off the mark.
Locate Peak - Locates the peak value in the displayed data.
Set Harmonic Difference
Mark RPM - Toggles the display of a mark at each revolution interval along the x-axis.
Grid [Ctrl+G] - Toggles the plot grid on and off.
Clear Plot [Delete] - Clears the plot (including the cursor)
Cursor - Allows the choice of three cursors

Single
Harmonic
Difference

Full Screen [Ctrl+F] - Toggles the plot between its normal size and full screen size.
Waveform (Spectrum/Trend) Properties - Displays information regarding the displayed data.
Print Current Plot - Prints the plot where the cursor is currently focused.

G-3

Right-Click in Region Below Plot X-Axis [ALT+F2]


Right-clicking below the horizontal axis of an active plot displays a list of X-Axis Options.
Some of these options may be grayed depending on the type and current state of the plot.

X-Axis Options Context Menu

Full Range [Num Pad 5] - Automatically scales the horizontal axis data to its full range.
Fixed Scale [Ctrl + Num Pad 5]- Displays a dialog box allowing you to specify the range
for the horizontal axis.
Expand [Num Pad *] - Zooms in the horizontal axis (decreases the x-axis range.)
Contract [Num Pad /] - Zooms out the horizontal axis (increases the x-axis range.)
Restore [Insert] - Restores the horizontal axis to an initial fixed scale.
Time (Waveform display only) - Sets the horizontal axis units to time.
Revolutions (Waveform display only) - Sets the horizontal axis units to revolutions.
Hertz (Spectrum display only) - Sets the horizontal axis to hertz.
Orders (Spectrum display only) - Sets the horizontal axis units to orders.

G-4

CPM (Spectrum display only) - Sets the horizontal axis units to CPM.

Right-Click in Plot Region Left of the Y-Axis [ALT+F1]


Right-clicking in the region to the left of the vertical axis of an active plot displays a list of
Y-Axis Options. Some of these options may be grayed depending on the type and current
state of the plot.

Y-Axis Context Menu

AutoScale [Home] Automatically scales the vertical axis to the minimum and maximum date values.
Fixed Scale [CTRL+Home] Displays a dialog box allowing the user to fix the range of
the vertical axis.
Magnify [NumPad +] Magnifies the vertical axis (decreases the y-axis range).
Reduce [NumPad -] Reduces the vertical axis (increases the y-axis range)
Restore [End] Restores the vertical axis to an initial fixed scale.
Linear (Spectrum Only) Sets the vertical axis scale to linear.
Log (Spectrum Only) Sets the vertical axis scale to log.

G-5

dB (Spectrum Only) Sets the vertical axis scale to decibels.


Units (Spectrum Only) Displays a submenu allowing the user to select different engineering units for Y-axis values. Typically for Vibration data these are Acceleration,
Velocity, Displacement and Stored Units. You can also select different unit modes from this
menu. These are RMS, Peak, Peak-Peak, and Stored Units.
RMS (Trend Only) Sets the units mode to RMS.
Peak (Trend Only) - Sets the units mode to Peak.
Peak - Peak (Trend Only) - Sets the units mode to Peak-Peak.

Other Keyboard Controls


Up/Down Arrow - Moves the cursor between different lines on multi-line plots.
Right/Left Arrow - Moves the cursor along the x-axis.
Ctrl+Up/Down Arrow - Moves the focus of the cursor to the next/previous plot. If only
one plot is showing, these controls have no effect.

G-6

Hot Key

Description

ALT+F1

Displays Y-Axis Options for the Active Plot

ALT+F2

Displays X-Axis Options for the Active Plot

ALT+F3

Displays Menu Options for the Active Plot

Ctrl+F

Toggles Active Plot Between Full Screen and


Normal Size

Ctrl+G

Toggles the Grid Off and On for the Active Plot

Ctrl+Home

Allows User to Fix Scales on the Y-Axis of the


Active Plot

Ctrl+M

Sets a Mark at the Cursor on the Active Plot

Ctrl+5 (on Number Pad) Allows User to Fix Scales on the X-Axis of the
Active Plot
Delete

Clears the cursor on the Active Plot

End

Restores Y-Axis to Original Fixed Scale for the


Active Plot

Home

Autoscales the Y-Axis on the Active Plot

Insert

Restores X-Axis to Original Fixed Scale for the


Active Plot

5 (on Number Pad)

Autoscales the X-Axis on the Active Plot

* (on Number Pad)

Expands or Zooms In the X-Axis View by


increasing the X-Axis Range

/ (on Number Pad)

Contracts or Zooms Out the X-Axis View by


increasing the X-Axis Range

+ (on Number Pad)

Magnifies or Zooms In the Y-Axis View by


decreasing the Y-Axis Range

- (on Number Pad)

Reduces or Zooms Out the Y-Axis View by


increasing the Y-Axis Range

G-7

G-8

Appendix

Online Server Program

Online Server INI File


Example entry:

Online server INI file example entry.

Explanation:

Mine: The list of the CSI 4500 unit IP addresses follows the same scheme as in the old
o_server.ini.file (This entry is maintained by the Netadmin application under Online Server
Configuration).
LiveDataInterval: This is the interval at which the 4500 mimic in the Online Config program gets units value updates in the ToolTips.
The TachReportInterval determines the backup reporting interval for tachometer data. This,
along with the absolute epsilon alarm level, controls the accuracy of the speed trend data
stored in the RBM database.
If StoreToDb is set to No, then all data reported to the online server is only sent to connected
online watch programs. It is not saved in the RBM database. This is here for users that have
not purchased the VibView applications that allow them to view historical data. In order to
avoid database size issues, historical data is not stored.

H-1

These changes/enhancements to the INI files are necessary for the new Online Server application operation under non-standard conditions. The entries shown here are the defaults in
the Online server, and do not have to be set by the INI file. However, if these times must be
adjusted, this is where this is done.

H-2

Architecture Enhancements
4500 Unit Broadcast No Longer Necessary

The new online server does not need a broadcast from a 4500 Unit to force a unit connection. Now the Online Server will actively attempt connection to the units defined under the
units area in RBMadmin (which inserts them into the INI file). If the unit was not online
at that time, the server attempts to connect every 5 minutes. This facilitates the use of the
system across routers, bridges, etc., which provides a base for true WAN support. The
broadcast function, however, is still supported.
4500 Unit Data Retention

The Online Server now supports the downloading of data from a box that has been disconnected from the server, but has been running and collecting data. This feature does have
limitations, however:
Data is lost across a soft/hard reset of the 4500 Unit.
Database configuration cannot change for the specified 4500 Unit between the time
it was first initialized and the next time the server connected.
This also implies that the 4500 Unit database updates are now at a 4500 Unit level, and not
at the database level. In other words, if there are three 4500 Units defined in a database, and
a change is made to a channel on one of the units, then only that unit would be reset, and
the other 4500 Units would be left alone.
Time Synchronization

The ability to synchronize our CSI 4500 and CSI 6500 systems with a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server has been added enabling a global ordering of events when connected to
a process control network. The time sent to the units is retrieved from the system time of
the computer that O_Server is running on. Therefore, the units will only by synchronized
with an NTP server if the O_Server computer is being synchronized with an NTP server.
The clock will be synchronized on an interval at a minimum of 60 seconds. This feature is
activated by entering the desired time synchronization interval in the following entry within
the O_Server.ini file:
UnitTimeSyncInterval=0s
0 seconds is the default which disables time synchronization.

H-3

New Fallback Mode

The Online Server can be installed in a special mode of operation. Please contact Customer
Support at 865-675-4274 for information about configuring this feature.

H-4

Appendix

Modifying and Archiving Databases

Online and Offline Database Modification


Making Online Modifications
Modify the existing RBM database online, implement the changes, and
continue collecting data to the current file.

The following instructions help you to make online changes to your database. These directions assume that the monitoring system is currently in operation, that you are at your desk,
and that you have administrative rights to Online Configuration and RBM SYS ADMIN.
Note

These changes affect the existing .RBM database. When the changes are
implemented, data collection resumes to the existing .RBM database.
1. Open Online Configuration and Connect to the Server

Open Online Configuration. Connect to the server (FILE / ONLINE SERVER / OPEN or
FILE / (Recent Server). This opens the current .RBM database.

Choose Open or Recent Server to open the current .RBM database.

I-1

2. Save the Current Database as a Template

Choose FILE / TEMPLATE database / SAVE AS to save a .CVB copy of the current database. Choose YES when prompted with the message about overwriting the existing .CVB
database
Note

Although a copy of the .CVB file may already exist in the CUSTDATA
directory, it is possible that changes to the .RBM file were made in Online
Configuration and these changes were not save to the .CVB file. We recommend that you store a master copy of the .CVB file in a safe place other
than the CUSTDATA folder.
3. Make Changes and Save a Template Copy

Make changes to the .RBM file as desired. Once you have finished making changes to the
database, save a copy to a template file by choosing FILE / TEMPLATE database / SAVE
AS. Save to a different file name or overwrite the old .CVB template file name)
4. Save to Online Server

Choose FILE / ONLINE SERVER / SAVE. Online Configuration sends the modified
database to the unit. After saving the file, Online Configuration closes down.
5. Open Online Watch and Begin Evaluating Changes

Open Online Watch, connect to the server, and begin evaluating the results of the database
changes.

I-2

Making Offline Modifications


Modify a template database offline, and then restart collection to a new (and empty) database.

The following directions allow you to make offline changes to your database. The instructions assume that your online system is currently in operation, that you are at your desk, and
that you have administrative rights to Online Configuration and RBM SYS ADMIN.
Note

These actions create a new (modified) database based on the properties of


the existing database. The new database can have a different name than the
old database. Online Watch trends are reset. The existing .RBM database is
deleted or archived.

Note

To implement the new template database you must archive or delete the old
RBM database. Offline changes to a .CVB file cannot be saved to the current RBM database.
1. Open Online Configuration and Connect to the Server

Open Online Configuration. Connect to the server (FILE / ONLINE SERVER / OPEN or
FILE / (Recent Server). The current .RBM database opens.
2. Save the Current File as a Template

Choose FILE / TEMPLATE database / SAVE AS to save a .CVB copy of the database
with the most recent changes that have been made to the .RBM file. Choose YES when
prompted with the message about overwriting the existing .CVB database.
Note

Although a copy of the .CVB file may already exist in the CUSTDATA
directory, it is possible that changes to the .RBM file were made in Online
Configuration and these changes were not saved to the .CVB file. We recommend that you store a master copy of the .CVB file in a safe place other
than the CUSTDATA folder.

I-3

3. Open the .CVB File

In Online Configuration, choose FILE / TEMPLATE database / OPEN and select the
.CVB file stored in the previous step
4. Make changes to the .CVB

When finished making changes to the .CVB file, save the file by choosing FILE / TEMPLATE database / SAVE. (Save to a new file name or overwrite the existing file.)
5. Using a New Database

The next steps assume that you wish to begin collecting data using the new database.
6. Stop Collecting Data

Go to RBM NETWORK ADMIN. Double click on the server listed in the online server
section at the bottom - middle of the window. Click on the STOP COLLECTING
DATA button. The button changes to start collecting data once data collection has been
stopped. Close down RBM Network Admin.
7. Delete or Archive Old Data

Using Windows Explorer, Go to the RBMsuite / CUSTDATA folder. Move the old .RBM
database and the folder with the same name out of the CUSTDATA folder OR delete both
if the data does not need to be archived
Note

This file may contain important Online data that needs to be saved. Delete
the data only if you are sure it is not needed.
8. Create a Subfolder

You may want to create a subfolder called DBarchive within the CUSTDATA folder. Then
you can move the .RBM database and the folder with the same name into this subfolder.
9. Connect to the Server from Online Configuration and Save

In Online Configuration, Choose FILE and connect to the server. Then, choose FILE /
ONLINE SERVER / SAVE. By default, Online Configuration saves the database with the
same file name as the template file and give it a .RBM file extension. Choose a different
filename if you want. After saving the file, Online Configuration closes down automatically.

I-4

10. Open Online Watch and Begin Evaluating Changes

Open Online Watch, connect to the server, and evaluate the results of the database changes.

I-5

Archiving a Database
Archive the current RBM database and collect to a new (empty) RBM database
from the template (CVB file)

These instructions allow you to delete or archive the current RBM database and begin collection to a new, empty database using the same (unmodified) template file (.CVB). The
instructions assume that online system is currently in operation, that are at your desk, and
that you have administrative rights to Online Configuration and RBM NETWORK
ADMIN.
Note

These actions create a new RBM database based on the properties of the
existing database. The new database has the same name as the old database.
Online Watch trends are reset. The existing RBM database can be deleted
or archived.
1. Open Online Configuration and Connect to the Server

Open Online Configuration. Connect to the server (FILE / ONLINE SERVER / OPEN or
FILE / (Recent Server). This opens the current .RBM database.
2. Save the .CVB Database

Choose FILE / TEMPLATE database / SAVE AS to save a copy of the .CVB database.
This insures that a current copy of the operating database is made. Choose YES when
prompted with the message about overwriting the existing .CVB database.
Note

Although a copy of the .CVB file may already exist in the CUSTDATA
directory, it is possible that changes to the .RBM file were made in Online
Configuration and these changes were not save to the .CVB file. We recommend that you save a master copy of the .CVB file in a safe place besides the
CUSTDATA folder).
If you want to begin collecting data using the new database, follow these steps:

I-6

3. Open Network Administration and Stop Collecting Data

Open RBM NETWORK ADMIN and double click on the server listed in the online
server section at the bottom-middle of the window. Click on the stop data collection
button. The button changes to start data collection when data collection stops.
4. Move or Delete the Old Database

Using Windows Explorer, go to the RBMsuite \ CUSTDATA folder. Move the old .RBM
database and the folder with the same name out of the CUSTDATA folder, or delete both
if you do not need to archive the data.
Note

This file may contain important Online data that needs to be saved delete
the data only if you are sure it is not needed.
5. Archive the Database

To archive the database, you may want to create a subfolder called DBarchive within the
CUSTDATA folder and move the .RBM database and the folder with the same name into
this subfolder.
Open Online Configuration. Choose FILE / TEMPLATE DATABASE / OPEN and open
the .CVB file. Connect to the server. Choose FILE / ONLINE SERVER / SAVE. Online
Configuration saves the database to the same name with a .RBM file extension. Online
Configuration closes down automatically.
6. Open Online Watch and Connect to the Server

Open Online Watch and connect to the server.


Note

It is a good practice to move unused .RBM databases out of the CUSTDATA directory. Any databases left in this folder are indexed. Indexing consumes system resources needlessly.

I-7

I-8

Appendix

CSI 4500/6500 Modbus Format and Addressing

Overview
The CSI 4500 / 6500 Modbus TCP interface is designed based on Modbus
Messaging On TCP/IP implantation Guide V10a and Modbus Application
Protocol Specification V1.1a available from http://Modbus-IDA.org. The CSI
4500 / 6500 does not directly support Modbus RTU or Modbus ASCII via a serial
interface. There are devices available that allow translation between the serial
protocol and the TCP/IP protocol (http://www.aaxeon.com, http://
www.gridconnect.com).
Modbus data in general can be an On/Off state, status information, or analog value.
Data can be represented as input (read only) and output (read/write) functions for
single bits or 16 bit quantities. Data types are Coils, Input Discretes, Input
Registers, and Holding Registers. Each type has a possible address range of 0
65,535. Each of the four data types is requested using a specific function code,
followed by the desired register address.
The CSI 4500 / 6500 is a read-only Modbus Slave which means only Input
Discretes and Input Registers are supported. The CSI 4500 / 6500 supports
Modbus function codes 0x02, 0x04, and 0x43. Attempting to access the CSI 4500 /
6500 using any but the supported function codes will result in an exception error
being returned.
With some Modbus Master systems, such as Ovation, the register addresses for the
four data types are specified with four different starting address ranges. For
example, Input Discretes are specified by adding a prefix of 10,000 or 100,000 to
the address and Input Registers are specified by adding a prefix of 30,000 or

J-1

300,000 to the address. This addressing method also starts with 1 instead of 0.
(e.g. Input Register address 0 is specified as 30,001 or 300,001.)
The original Modbus protocol only provided access to the first 10,000 addresses
within each data type. The data types were addressed as follows:
Name
Coils
Input Discretes
Input Registers
Holding Registers

Type
Single bit
Single bit
16-bit word
16-bit word

Access
Read-Write
Read-Only
Read-Only
Read-Write

Register Addresses
00001 - 9,999
10,001 - 19,999
30,001 39,999
40,001 - 49,999

A newer extended format provides access to all 65,535 addresses within each data
type. The data types are then addressed as follows:
Name

Coils
Input Discretes
Input Registers
Holding Registers

Type
Single bit
Single bit
16-bit word
16-bit word

Access
Read-Write
Read-Only
Read-Only
Read-Write

Register Addresses
000001 - 65,536
100,001 - 165,536
300,001 - 365,536
400,001 - 465,536

The CSI 4500 / 6500 supports the extended addressing format.


Support for multiple Modbus Master connections was extended (in firmware
version 4.21T for the CSI 6500 and version 3.21T for the CSI 4500) to 8
simultaneous connections.
Licensing
The CSI 4500 / 6500 Modbus output is a licensed feature that must be enabled in
order to function. The Modbus output is enabled at the factory when this option is
purchased with a new unit. It can also be enabled in the field by an Emerson
Online Service Engineer.

J-2

To determine if the Modbus option is enabled, type showLicensedFeatures from a


TelNet or Hyperterminal session with the CSI 4500/6500.

CSI 4500 / 6500 Modbus Register Details


The Digital I/O relay states are accessible as Input Discrete values. The rest of the
CSI 4500 / 6500 data is accessible as Input Register values.
Note: With firmware version x.22, the Modbus register addresses can be remapped
into a user defined order. This option is configured by right clicking the unit in
O_Config and selecting Modbus Mapping. The register addresses in the following
descriptions refer to the factory default register order.
The Input Registers are divided into the following four areas:
-AC and DC gross-scan measurements, with associated quality and alarm status.
-Tachometer measurements, with associated quality and alarm status.
-System Information
-Data Collection Sets (i.e. Analysis Parameter values)
The AC, DC, TACH and System information registers are always available. The
Data Collection Sets are only available when properly configured through
O_Config. These data areas are each described below. The entire list of possible
CSI 4500 / 6500 Modbus register addresses are listed in Appendix A. The
addresses are identical between the CSI 4500 and the CSI 6500, except for the
Data Collection Set addresses.
Modbus Function code 0x02 Read Input Discretes
Sixteen Input Discretes are available to allow a Modbus Master to determine the
current state of each Digital I/O (DIO) channel of the CSI 4500/6500. Each of the
sixteen Input Discrete values corresponds to one of the 16 DIO channels. A value
of 1 indicates the relay/input is activated. A value of 0 indicates the relay/input is
not activated.
The Input Discretes are defined as follows:

J-3

Address
Description
Data Type
0 (100001)DIO Channel 1 Relay State Bit Field
1 (100002)DIO Channel 2 Relay State Bit Field
2 (100003)DIO Channel 3 Relay State Bit Field
3 (100004)DIO Channel 4 Relay State Bit Field
4 (100005)DIO Channel 5 Relay State Bit Field
5 (100006)DIO Channel 6 Relay State Bit Field
6 (100007)DIO Channel 7 Relay State Bit Field
7 (100008)DIO Channel 8 Relay State Bit Field
8 (100009)DIO Channel 9 Relay State Bit Field
9 (100010)DIO Channel 10 Relay State Bit Field
10 (100011)DIO Channel 11 Relay State Bit Field
11 (100012)DIO Channel 12 Relay State Bit Field
12 (100013)DIO Channel 13 Relay State Bit Field
13 (100014)DIO Channel 14 Relay State Bit Field
14 (100015)DIO Channel 15 Relay State Bit Field
15 (100016)DIO Channel 16 Relay State Bit Field

Note

Modbus provides for reading multiple Input Discretes at once.

Note

Two additional 16-bit Input Registers are provided, in the System Information area, that indicate which DIOs are configured as Inputs and which are
configured as Outputs.

Modbus Function Code 0x04 Read Input Registers


The Input Registers are defined below. Note that when reading a series of
registers, the starting register MUST BE a valid register (if not an exception error
is returned). However, if a group of registers are read and the first register address
is valid, any invalid registers within the group are returned as zero values (without
an exception error being returned).

J-4

Input Registers 0 319: AC/DC (Gross scan) Data


Address
0 63
64127
128159
160191
192223
224255
256319

Description

Data Type

(300001300064):
(300065300128):
(300129300160):
(300161300192):
(300193300224):
(300225300256):
(300257300320):

Channels 132
Channels 132
Channels 132
Channels 132
Channels 132
Channels 132
Channels 132

AC gross-scan values(float, 2 registers each)


DC gross-scan values (float, 2 registers each)
AC Alarm Status (uint16, 1 register each)
AC Quality (uint16, 1 register each)
DC Alarm Status (uint16, 1 register each)
DC Quality (uint16, 1 register each)
Time Stamp (time_t, 2 registers each)

AC and DC gross-scan values


With firmware version 4.21T for the CSI 6500 and version 4.21T for the CSI
4500, the data values can be output in Engineering Units (e.g. mils, inch/sec, gs)
instead of Volts. This conversion happens automatically when the Modbus
registers are remapped, and can be applied optionally while leaving the registers in
the default order.
Prior to those firmware versions: AC and DC gross-scan values were only output
in units of Volts RMS, except for Transient channels configured in Peak-Peak
units (those values were output in Volts Peak-Peak). Analysis Parameter values
were always output in Volts RMS, whether Transient or not.
The gross scan values are converted from Volts RMS to Engineering Units as
follows:
For RMS units (e.g. gs RMS): Divide by the sensor sensitivity.
For Peak units (e.g. inches/sec Peak): Divide by sensor sensitivity and multiply by
1.414.
For P-P units (e.g. mils P-P): Divide by sensor sensitivity and multiply by 2.828.
For Transient P-P units: Just divide by the sensor sensitivity.
AC and DC Quality values give an indication of whether the signal should be
considered valid for each channel. Each 16 bit Quality value represents the
following information:

J-5

Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6-8
9
10
11
12
13-15

Meaning
Timeout
Over-range
Under-range
Power On Self Test Failed
Bad DC Value
Bad Overall Value
(not used)
Scan Paused
Channel Disabled
Overall Data not applicable for this channel
Channel is settling
(not used)

AC and DC Alarm Status values are a combination of Alarm Urgency and


Alarm State for each channel. Within each 16 bit value, the upper 8 bits represent
the Alarm Urgency and the lower 8 bits represent the Alarm State.
The Alarm Urgency is defined as follows:
Value
0x00
0x20
0x40
0x60
0xa0
0xf0

Meaning
The alarm has transitioned to Normal
Value is based on time-based reporting
Lowest priority or Notify alarm notification
Mid level or Urgent alarm notification
Highest level or Critical alarm notification
Indicates a system level problem (i.e. health monitor failures)

The Alarm State is defined as follows:


Value
0x00
0x08
0x0a
0x11
0x23
0x26

J-6

Meaning
No alarm condition exists
Alarm startup state
Time based report
Absolute epsilon
Alarm low
Alarm high

0x29
0x2c
0x32
0x53
0x56
0x63
0x6a
0x6b
0x6c
0x72
0x73
0x81
0x82
0x83
0x84
0x85
0x86
0x91
0x92
0x93
0x94
0x95
0x96
0x97
0x98
0x99
0x9a
0x9b
0x9c
0x9d
0x9e
0x9f
0xa3
0xa6
0xa9
0xac
0xad
0xb1
0xb2
0xc4

Alarm low-low
Alarm high-high
Alarm Phase Reference
Alarm DIO low
Alarm DIO high
Rate of change alarm
Increasing Delta alarm
Decreasing delta alarm
Alarm absolute delta
DSP failed to restart on consecutive collections
Unable to restart DSP
DSP entry disabled do to consecutive failures
DSP entry disabled do to invalid trigger
DSP entry disabled do a bad module
DSP entry disabled do a tachometer is missing
DSP entry disabled do predicate error
DSP entry disabled do an invalid configuration
Acquisition was aborted do to predicate level fault
Acquisition aborted predicate duration fault
Acquisition was aborted do to a DSP timeout
Acquisition was aborted do to external abort
Acquisition was aborted do to a general failure
Acquisition aborted - companion channel fault
Acquisition was aborted do to trigger timeout
Acquisition was aborted do to an ADC over-range
Acquisition was aborted do to entry disabled
Acquisition aborted do to hardware quality failure
Acquisition was aborted do to DSP over-run
Aborted do erratic tachometer (>50%)
Acquisition was aborted do an unstable tachometer
Acquisition was aborted do turning speed to high
Acquisition was aborted do turning speed to low
Data is questionable do a bad low input
Data is questionable do a bad high input
Data is questionable do invalid low result
Data is questionable do invalid high result
Data is questionable do to data clipping
TRANSIENT streaming has started or stopped
TRANSIENT DSP has failed
Hardware failure - over-range

J-7

0xc8
0xcb
0xcc
0xcd
0xd1
0xf0

Hardware failure under-range


Hardware failure timeout
Hardware failure invalid analysis parameter
Hardware failure over frequency
Predicate change
System level error

Time Stamp values are formatted in Epoch time, which is the number of seconds
since midnight Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) of January 1,1970 not counting
leap seconds.

J-8

Input Registers 512 - 2047: Tachometer Data


Address
5121022
10241534
15361791
17922047

Description
(300513-301023):
(301025-301535):
(301537-301792):
(301793-302048):

Data Type

Channel 1256
Channel 1256
Channel 1256
Channel 1256

Tach values, in Hz. (float, 2 registers each)


Tach Time Stamps (time_t, 2 registers each)
Tach Quality (uint16, 1 register each)
Tach Alarm Status (uint16, 1 register each)

Note: The 256 tach channel addresses represent the 16 physical tach values,
followed by address spacing for 15 virtual tachs for Channel 1, then address
spacing for 15 virtual tachs for Channel 2, etc. Only 4 virtual tachs are actually
supported for each channel.
Tach Quality values are formatted as a 16 bit field defined as follows:
Bit
Meaning
15 Timeout on tach acquisition
14
Result outside reasonable range
13
Acquisition is paused
12
Configuration is invalid
11
Channel disabled
10
Reference channel is disabled
9-0
(not used)

Tach Alarm Status values are defined the same way as described earlier for the
AC/DC (Gross scan) Alarm Status.

J-9

Input Registers 3072 3227: System Data


Address

Description

Data Type

3072-3073 (303073-303074)Main procesor IP Address (32bit integer)


3074-3075 (303075-303076)Transient IP Address (32bit integer)
3076-3077 (303077-303078)HOST IP Address (32bit integer)
3078-3080 (303079-303081)DCM 6 byte MAC address
3081-3083 (303082-303084)TRAN 6 byte MAC address
3084-3085 (303085-303086)Transient Oldest Time Stamp (time_t)
3086-3087 (303087-303088)Transient Newest Time Stamp (time_t)
3088-3215 (303089-303216)(not used)
3229 (303230)O_server connected flag (1 = connected, 0 = not connected) (uint16)*
3230 (303231)Transient streaming-to-disk flag (1 = streaming, 0 = not streaming) (uint16)*
3231 (303232)Internal Unit temperature (uint16)*
*Added in firmware versions: CSI 6500 version 4.21T, CSI 4500 version 3.21T
3216-3217 (303217-303218)Hardware Init Flags (int32)
Meaning
Bit
0
Battery failure
1
Real time clock failure
2
Check real time clock
3
(unused)
4
ramSimm1 Bad
5
ramSimm2 Bad
6
ramSimm3 Bad
7
ramSimm4 Bad
8
GS POST failed
9
TACH POST failed
10
DIO POST failed
11
Spectrum scan POST failed
12
PDT temperature warning
13
Power failure
14
Power POST failed
15
FIFO POST failed
16
DSP boot failure
17
DSP memory test failure
18
DSP table load failure
19
(unused)
20
GS POST was skipped
21
TACH POST was skipped

J-10

22
23
24
25
26
27

DIO POST was skipped


Spectrum scan POST was skipped
TRANISENT DSP POST failed
TRANISENT DSP POST skipped
TRANISENT HDD POST failed
TRANSIENT HDD POST skipped

3218-3219 (303219-303220)Firmware Init Flags (int32)


Meaning
Bit
0
Unit status init failed
0
Health monitor init failed
0
EE Prom init failed
0
Board ID init failed
0
Archive manager init failed
0
MUX init failed
0
Predicate module init failed
0
Mode switching management failed
0
REBOOT Manager init failed
0
RTC failed to initialize
0
MODBUS failed to initialize
0
Network Server failed to init
0
Alarm facility failed to init
0
Time based report facility failed to init
0
Work Request module failed to init
0
DIO module failed to init
0
Temperature module failed to init
0
Internal test generator failed to init
0
Tachometer module failed to init
0
Overall module failed to init
0
Spectrum module failed to init
0
Configuration facility failed to init
0
Health monitor failed to init
0
Report facility failed to init
0
Diagnostic facility failed to init
0
Watchdog timer failed to init
0
Transient FIFO failed to init
0
Display manager failed to init
0
Power Fail monitor failed to init
0
Transient failed to init
0
EGU configuration table failed to init

J-11

Browser failed to init

3220-3221 (303221-303222)System Init Flags (int32)


Bit
Meaning
0
RTC time has been set
0
Memory Low
0
Tachometer invalid
0
DIO configuration invalid
0
Watchdog timer list corrupted
0
Spectrum scan list is corrupted
0
NMI disabled
9
PEAKVUE enabled
10
GS Data broadcast enabled
11
Browser enabled
12
Transient failure
13
MODBUS enabled
3222 (303223)System Watchdog
3223 (303224)Identifies which DIO channels are configured as Outputs (16 bit)
3224 (303225)Identifies which DIO channels are configured as Inputs (16 bit)
3225 (303226)Internal output relay Mask
(16 bit)
3226-3227 (303227-303228)Configuration Time Stamp
(time_t, 2 registers)

Note: Register 3223 is a 16bit register, where each bit is associated with a Digitial
I/O channel. A 1 indicates the channel is an Output and a 0 indicates it is an
Input.
Register 3224 provides similar information, where a 1 indicates an Input.

J-12

Input Registers 4096 25504: DCS (Analysis Parameter) Data


The extended address scheme is required in order to access all possible data for a
fully configured 32 channels, each with up to seven different Data Collection Sets
(DCS), with each DCS containing up to 24 analysis parameters. Limited AP data
are available using the older addressing scheme (input registers 30001-39999).
This limitation is that channels 1-29 can only address 2 DCS, and channels 31 and
32 can only address a single DCS. Note if a DCS isnt defined, a Modbus
exception error will be generated.
The registers contained in a single DCS block are defined in the following table.
Data for DCS#1 on all channels is addressed first, then data for DCS#2 on all
channels, etc.
The starting register for each DCS block can be calculated as follows:
Register = 4096 + (CHANNEL_NUMBER -1) * 96 + (DCS#-1) * 96 * TotalMuxChans

Where CHANNEL_NUMBER is the analog input channel (1 to 32), DCS# is the


Data Collection Set number (1-7) for the selected channel, and TotalMuxChans is
32 for a CSI 4500 or 24 for a CSI 6500.
AddressDescription

Data Type

Register+0Analysis Parameter #1float


Register+2Analysis Parameter #2float
Register+4Analysis Parameter #3float
Register+6Analysis Parameter #4float
Register+8Analysis Parameter #5float
Register+10Analysis Parameter #6float
Register+12Analysis Parameter #7float
Register+14Analysis Parameter #8float
Register+16Analysis Parameter #9float
Register+18Analysis Parameter #10float
Register+20Analysis Parameter #11float
Register+22Analysis Parameter #12float
Register+24Analysis Parameter #13float
Register+26Analysis Parameter #14float
Register+28Analysis Parameter #15float
Register+30Analysis Parameter #16float

J-13

Register+32Analysis Parameter #17float


Register+34Analysis Parameter #18float
Register+36Analysis Parameter #19float
Register+38Analysis Parameter #20float
Register+40Analysis Parameter #21float
Register+42Analysis Parameter #22float
Register+44Analysis Parameter #23float
Register+46Analysis Parameter #24float
Register+48Analysis Parameter #1 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values
Register+49Analysis Parameter #2 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values

Register+50Analysis Parameter #3 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values


Register+51Analysis Parameter #4 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values
Register+52Analysis Parameter #5 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values
Register+53Analysis Parameter #6 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values
Register+54Analysis Parameter #7 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values
Register+55Analysis Parameter #8 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values
Register+56Analysis Parameter #9 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values
Register+57Analysis Parameter #10Alarm Statustwo 8bit values
Register+58Analysis Parameter #11 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values

J-14

Register+59Analysis Parameter #12 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values


Register+60Analysis Parameter #13 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values
Register+61Analysis Parameter #14 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values
Register+62Analysis Parameter #15 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values
Register+63Analysis Parameter #16 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values
Register+64Analysis Parameter #17 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values
Register+65Analysis Parameter #18 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values
Register+66Analysis Parameter #19 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values
Register+67Analysis Parameter #20 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values
Register+68Analysis Parameter #21 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values
Register+69Analysis Parameter #22 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values
Register+70Analysis Parameter #23 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values
Register+71Analysis Parameter #24 Alarm Statustwo 8bit values
Register+72Acquisition time stamptime_t
Register+74Predicate State
bit flags
Meaning
Bit
0
Predicate state, 1=TRUE 0=FALSE (only valid if bit 1 is TRUE)
0
Predicate state valid flag
2-14
(not used)
15
AP valid
Registers+75+95 (not used)

The bit definitions for Analysis Parameter Alarm Status are the same as described
earlier for the AC/DC (Gross scan) Alarm Status

Modbus Function code 0x43 SubFunction 14 Read Device Identification


Returns vendor and product name as per Modbus Spec v1.1a for device code 1.
For the CSI 4500 the vendor Computational Systems, Inc is returned and for the
product name the DSP module name is returned.

J-15

Appendix A: CSI 4500 / CSI 6500 Input Register addresses


AC/DC (Gross scan) Data
Multiplexer Channel 1 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 2 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 3 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 4 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 5 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 6 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 7 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 8 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 9 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 10 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 11 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 12 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 13 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 14 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 15 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 16 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 17 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 18 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 19 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 20 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 21 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 22 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 23 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 24 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 25 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 26 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 27 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 28 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 29 AC:
Multiplexer Channel 30 AC:

J-16

0( 300001 )0x0000
2( 300003 )0x0002
4( 300005 )0x0004
6( 300007 )0x0006
8( 300009 )0x0008
10( 300011 )0x000a
12( 300013 )0x000c
14( 300015 )0x000e
16( 300017 )0x0010
18( 300019 )0x0012
20( 300021 )0x0014
22( 300023 )0x0016
24( 300025 )0x0018
26( 300027 )0x001a
28( 300029 )0x001c
30( 300031 )0x001e
32( 300033 )0x0020
34( 300035 )0x0022
36( 300037 )0x0024
38( 300039 )0x0026
40( 300041 )0x0028
42( 300043 )0x002a
44( 300045 )0x002c
46( 300047 )0x002e
48( 300049 )0x0030
50( 300051 )0x0032
52( 300053 )0x0034
54( 300055 )0x0036
56( 300057 )0x0038
58( 300059 )0x003a

Multiplexer Channel 31 AC: 60( 300061 )0x003c


Multiplexer Channel 32 AC: 62( 300063 )0x003e
Multiplexer Channel 1 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 2 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 3 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 4 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 5 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 6 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 7 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 8 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 9 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 10 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 11 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 12 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 13 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 14 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 15 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 16 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 17 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 18 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 19 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 20 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 21 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 22 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 23 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 24 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 25 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 26 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 27 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 28 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 29 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 30 DC:
Multiplexer Channel 31 DC:

64( 300065 )0x0040


66( 300067 )0x0042
68( 300069 )0x0044
70( 300071 )0x0046
72( 300073 )0x0048
74( 300075 )0x004a
76( 300077 )0x004c
78( 300079 )0x004e
80( 300081 )0x0050
82( 300083 )0x0052
84( 300085 )0x0054
86( 300087 )0x0056
88( 300089 )0x0058
90( 300091 )0x005a
92( 300093 )0x005c
94( 300095 )0x005e
96( 300097 )0x0060
98( 300099 )0x0062
100( 300101 )0x0064
102( 300103 )0x0066
104( 300105 )0x0068
106( 300107 )0x006a
108( 300109 )0x006c
110( 300111 )0x006e
112( 300113 )0x0070
114( 300115 )0x0072
116( 300117 )0x0074
118( 300119 )0x0076
120( 300121 )0x0078
122( 300123 )0x007a
124( 300125 )0x007c

J-17

Multiplexer Channel 32 DC: 126( 300127 )0x007e


Multiplexer Channel 1 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 2 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 3 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 4 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 5 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 6 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 7 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 8 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 9 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 10 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 11 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 12 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 13 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 14 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 15 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 16 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 17 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 18 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 19 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 20 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 21 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 22 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 23 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 24 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 25 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 26 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 27 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 28 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 29 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 30 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 31 AC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 32 AC Alarm Status:

J-18

128(
129(
130(
131(
132(
133(
134(
135(
136(
137(
138(
139(
140(
141(
142(
143(
144(
145(
146(
147(
148(
149(
150(
151(
152(
153(
154(
155(
156(
157(
158(
159(

300129 )0x0080
300130 )0x0081
300131 )0x0082
300132 )0x0083
300133 )0x0084
300134 )0x0085
300135 )0x0086
300136 )0x0087
300137 )0x0088
300138 )0x0089
300139 )0x008a
300140 )0x008b
300141 )0x008c
300142 )0x008d
300143 )0x008e
300144 )0x008f
300145 )0x0090
300146 )0x0091
300147 )0x0092
300148 )0x0093
300149 )0x0094
300150 )0x0095
300151 )0x0096
300152 )0x0097
300153 )0x0098
300154 )0x0099
300155 )0x009a
300156 )0x009b
300157 )0x009c
300158 )0x009d
300159 )0x009e
300160 )0x009f

Multiplexer Channel 1 AC Quality:


Multiplexer Channel 2 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 3 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 4 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 5 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 6 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 7 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 8 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 9 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 10 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 11 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 12 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 13 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 14 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 15 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 16 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 17 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 18 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 19 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 20 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 21 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 22 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 23 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 24 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 25 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 26 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 27 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 28 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 29 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 30 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 31 AC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 32 AC Quality:

160(
161(
162(
163(
164(
165(
166(
167(
168(
169(
170(
171(
172(
173(
174(
175(
176(
177(
178(
179(
180(
181(
182(
183(
184(
185(
186(
187(
188(
189(
190(
191(

300161 )0x00a0
300162 )0x00a1
300163 )0x00a2
300164 )0x00a3
300165 )0x00a4
300166 )0x00a5
300167 )0x00a6
300168 )0x00a7
300169 )0x00a8
300170 )0x00a9
300171 )0x00aa
300172 )0x00ab
300173 )0x00ac
300174 )0x00ad
300175 )0x00ae
300176 )0x00af
300177 )0x00b0
300178 )0x00b1
300179 )0x00b2
300180 )0x00b3
300181 )0x00b4
300182 )0x00b5
300183 )0x00b6
300184 )0x00b7
300185 )0x00b8
300186 )0x00b9
300187 )0x00ba
300188 )0x00bb
300189 )0x00bc
300190 )0x00bd
300191 )0x00be
300192 )0x00bf

J-19

Multiplexer Channel 1 DC Alarm Status:


Multiplexer Channel 2 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 3 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 4 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 5 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 6 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 7 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 8 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 9 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 10 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 11 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 12 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 13 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 14 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 15 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 16 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 17 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 18 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 19 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 20 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 21 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 22 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 23 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 24 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 25 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 26 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 27 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 28 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 29 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 30 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 31 DC Alarm Status:
Multiplexer Channel 32 DC Alarm Status:

192(
193(
194(
195(
196(
197(
198(
199(
200(
201(
202(
203(
204(
205(
206(
207(
208(
209(
210(
211(
212(
213(
214(
215(
216(
217(
218(
219(
220(
221(
222(
223(

300192 )
300193 )
300194 )
300195 )
300196 )
300197 )
300198 )
300199 )
300200 )
300201 )
300202 )
300203 )
300204 )
300205 )
300206 )
300207 )
300208 )
300209 )
300210 )
300211 )
300212 )
300213 )
300214 )
300215 )
300216 )
300217 )
300218 )
300219 )
300220 )
300221 )
300222 )
300223 )

Multiplexer Channel 1 DC Quality: 224( 300224 )

J-20

Multiplexer Channel 2 DC Quality:


Multiplexer Channel 3 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 4 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 5 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 6 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 7 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 8 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 9 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 10 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 11 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 12 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 13 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 14 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 15 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 16 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 17 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 18 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 19 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 20 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 21 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 22 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 23 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 24 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 25 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 26 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 27 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 28 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 29 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 30 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 31 DC Quality:
Multiplexer Channel 32 DC Quality:

225(
226(
227(
228(
229(
230(
231(
232(
233(
234(
235(
236(
237(
238(
239(
240(
241(
242(
243(
244(
245(
246(
247(
248(
249(
250(
251(
252(
253(
254(
255(

300225 )
300226 )
300227 )
300228 )
300229 )
300230 )
300231 )
300232 )
300233 )
300234 )
300235 )
300236 )
300237 )
300238 )
300239 )
300240 )
300241 )
300242 )
300243 )
300244 )
300245 )
300246 )
300247 )
300248 )
300249 )
300250 )
300251 )
300252 )
300253 )
300254 )
300255 )

Multiplexer Channel 1 Time Stamp: 256( 300256 )


Multiplexer Channel 2 Time Stamp: 258( 300258 )

J-21

Multiplexer Channel 3 Time Stamp:


Multiplexer Channel 4 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 5 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 6 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 7 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 8 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 9 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 10 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 11 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 12 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 13 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 14 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 15 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 16 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 17 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 18 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 19 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 20 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 21 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 22 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 23 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 24 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 25 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 26 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 27 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 28 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 29 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 30 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 31 Time Stamp:
Multiplexer Channel 32 Time Stamp:

260(
262(
264(
266(
268(
270(
272(
274(
276(
278(
280(
282(
284(
286(
288(
290(
292(
294(
296(
298(
300(
302(
304(
306(
308(
310(
312(
314(
316(
318(

300260 )
300262 )
300264 )
300266 )
300268 )
300270 )
300272 )
300274 )
300276 )
300278 )
300280 )
300282 )
300284 )
300286 )
300288 )
300290 )
300292 )
300294 )
300296 )
300298 )
300300 )
300302 )
300304 )
300306 )
300308 )
300310 )
300312 )
300314 )
300216 )
300218 )

Tachometer Data
Tach Channel 1 Speed HZ: 512( 300513 )0x0200

J-22

Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel

2 Speed HZ:
3 Speed HZ:
4 Speed HZ:
5 Speed HZ:
6 Speed HZ:
7 Speed HZ:
8 Speed HZ:
9 Speed HZ:
10 Speed HZ:
11 Speed HZ:
12 Speed HZ:
13 Speed HZ:
14 Speed HZ:
15 Speed HZ:
16 Speed HZ:

514(
516(
518(
520(
522(
524(
526(
528(
530(
532(
534(
536(
538(
540(
542(

300515 )0x0202
300517 )0x0204
300519 )0x0206
300521 )0x0208
300523 )0x020a
300525 )0x020c
300527 )0x020e
300529 )0x0210
300531 )0x0212
300533 )0x0214
300535 )0x0216
300537 )0x0218
300539 )0x021a
300541 )0x021c
300543 )0x021e

Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel

1, Virtual Tach 1, Speed in HZ:


1, Virtual Tach 2, Speed in Hz:
1, Virtual Tach 3, Speed in Hz:
1, Virtual Tach 4, Speed in Hz:

544(
546(
548(
550(

300545 )0x0220
300547 )0x0222
300549 )0x0224
300551 )0x0226

Tach Channel 2, Virtual Tach 1, Speed in Hz:


Tach Channel 2, Virtual Tach 2, Speed in Hz:
Tach Channel 2, Virtual Tach 3, Speed in Hz:
Tach Channel 2, Virtual Tach 4, Speed in Hz:

574(
576(
578(
580(

300575 )0x023e
300577 )0x0240
300579 )0x0242
300581 )0x0244

Tach Channel 3, Virtual Tach 1, Speed in Hz:


Tach Channel 3, Virtual Tach 2, Speed in Hz:
Tach Channel 3, Virtual Tach 3, Speed in Hz:
Tach Channel 3, Virtual Tach 4, Speed in Hz:

604(
606(
608(
610(

300605 )0x025c
300607 )0x025e
300609 )0x0260
300611 )0x0262

Tach Channel 4, Virtual Tach 1, Speed in Hz: 634( 300635 )0x027a


Tach Channel 4, Virtual Tach 2, Speed in Hz: 636( 300637 )0x027c
Tach Channel 4, Virtual Tach 3, Speed in Hz: 638( 300639 )0x027e

J-23

Tach Channel 4, Virtual Tach 4, Speed in Hz: 640( 300641 )0x0280

Tach Channel 5, Virtual Tach 1, Speed in Hz:


Tach Channel 5, Virtual Tach 2, Speed in Hz:
Tach Channel 5, Virtual Tach 3, Speed in Hz:
Tach Channel 5, Virtual Tach 4, Speed in Hz:

664(
666(
668(
670(

300665 )0x0298
300667 )0x029a
300669 )0x029c
300671 )0x029e

Tach Channel 6, Virtual Tach 1, Speed in Hz:


Tach Channel 6, Virtual Tach 2, Speed in Hz:
Tach Channel 6, Virtual Tach 3, Speed in Hz:
Tach Channel 6, Virtual Tach 4, Speed in Hz:

694(
696(
698(
700(

300695 )0x02b6
300697 )0x02b8
300699 )0x02ba
300701 )0x02bc

Tach Channel 7, Virtual Tach 1, Speed in Hz:


Tach Channel 7, Virtual Tach 2, Speed in Hz:
Tach Channel 7, Virtual Tach 3, Speed in Hz:
Tach Channel 7, Virtual Tach 4, Speed in Hz:

724(
726(
728(
730(

300725 )0x02d4
300727 )0x02d6
300729 )0x02d8
300731 )0x02da

Tach Channel 8, Virtual Tach 1, Speed in Hz:


Tach Channel 8, Virtual Tach 2, Speed in Hz:
Tach Channel 8, Virtual Tach 3, Speed in Hz:
Tach Channel 8, Virtual Tach 4, Speed in Hz:

754(
756(
758(
760(

300755 )0x02f2
300757 )0x02f4
300759 )0x02f6
300761 )0x02f8

Tach Channel 9, Virtual Tach 1, Speed in Hz:


Tach Channel 9, Virtual Tach 2, Speed in Hz:
Tach Channel 9, Virtual Tach 3, Speed in Hz:
Tach Channel 9, Virtual Tach 4, Speed in Hz:

784(
786(
788(
790(

300785 )0x0310
300787 )0x0312
300789 )0x0314
300791 )0x0316

Tach Channel 10, Virtual Tach 1, Speed in Hz:


Tach Channel 10, Virtual Tach 2, Speed in Hz:
Tach Channel 10, Virtual Tach 3, Speed in Hz:
Tach Channel 10, Virtual Tach 4, Speed in Hz:

J-24

814(
816(
818(
820(

300815 )0x032e
300817 )0x0330
300819 )0x0332
300821 )0x0334

Tach Channel 11, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 11, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 11, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 11, Virtual Tach 4,

Speed in Hz:
Speed in Hz:
Speed in Hz:
Speed in Hz:

844(
846(
848(
850(

300845 )0x034c
300847 )0x034e
300849 )0x0350
300851 )0x0352

Tach Channel 12, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 12, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 12, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 12, Virtual Tach 4,

Speed in Hz:
Speed in Hz:
Speed in Hz:
Speed in Hz:

874(
876(
878(
880(

300875 )0x036a
300877 )0x036c
300879 )0x036e
300881 )0x0370

Tach Channel 13, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 13, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 13, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 13, Virtual Tach 4,

Speed in Hz:
Speed in Hz:
Speed in Hz:
Speed in Hz:

904(
906(
908(
910(

300905 )0x0388
300907 )0x038a
300909 )0x038c
300911 )0x038e

Tach Channel 14, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 14, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 14, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 14, Virtual Tach 4,

Speed in Hz:
Speed in Hz:
Speed in Hz:
Speed in Hz:

934(
936(
938(
940(

300935 )0x03a6
300937 )0x03a8
300939 )0x03aa
300941 )0x03ac

Tach Channel 15, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 15, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 15, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 15, Virtual Tach 4,

Speed in Hz:
Speed in Hz:
Speed in Hz:
Speed in Hz:

964(
966(
968(
970(

300965 )0x03c4
300967 )0x03c6
300969 )0x03c8
300971 )0x03ca

Tach Channel 16, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 16, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 16, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 16, Virtual Tach 4,

Speed in Hz:
Speed in Hz:
Speed in Hz:
Speed in Hz:

994(
996(
998(
1000(

300995 )0x03e2
300997 )0x03e4
300999 )0x03e6
301001 )0x03e8

Tach Channel 1 Time Stamp: 1024( 301025 )0x0400


Tach Channel 2 Time Stamp: 1026( 301027 )0x0402
Tach Channel 3 Time Stamp: 1028( 301029 )0x0404

J-25

Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel

4 Time Stamp: 1030(


5 Time Stamp: 1032(
6 Time Stamp: 1034(
7 Time Stamp: 1036(
8 Time Stamp: 1038(
9 Time Stamp: 1040(
10 Time Stamp: 1042(
11 Time Stamp: 1044(
12 Time Stamp: 1046(
13 Time Stamp: 1048(
14 Time Stamp: 1050(
15 Time Stamp: 1052(
16 Time Stamp: 1054(

301031 )0x0406
301033 )0x0408
301035 )0x040a
301037 )0x040c
301039 )0x040e
301041 )0x0410
301043 )0x0412
301045 )0x0414
301047 )0x0416
301049 )0x0418
301051 )0x041a
301053 )0x041c
301055 )0x041e

Tach Channel 1, Virtual Tach 1, Time Stamp:


Tach Channel 1, Virtual Tach 2, Time Stamp:
Tach Channel 1, Virtual Tach 3, Time Stamp:
Tach Channel 1, Virtual Tach 4, Time Stamp:

1056(
1058(
1060(
1062(

301057 )0x0420
301059 )0x0422
301061 )0x0424
301063 )0x0426

Tach Channel 2, Virtual Tach 1, Time Stamp:


Tach Channel 2, Virtual Tach 2, Time Stamp:
Tach Channel 2, Virtual Tach 3, Time Stamp:
Tach Channel 2, Virtual Tach 4, Time Stamp:

1086(
1088(
1090(
1092(

301087 )0x043e
301089 )0x0440
301091 )0x0442
301093 )0x0444

Tach Channel 3, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 3, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 3, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 3, Virtual Tach 4,
Tach Channel 4, Virtual Tach 1,
Tach Channel 4, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 4, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 4, Virtual Tach 4,

1116(
1118(
1120(
1122(
1146(
1148(
1150(
1152(

301117 )0x045c
301119 )0x045e
301121 )0x0460
301123 )0x0462
301147 )0x047a
301149 )0x047c
301151 )0x047e
301153 )0x0480

Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:

Tach Channel 5, Virtual Tach 1, Time Stamp: 1176( 301177 )0x0498

J-26

Tach Channel 5, Virtual Tach 2, Time Stamp: 1178( 301179 )0x049a


Tach Channel 5, Virtual Tach 3, Time Stamp: 1180( 301181 )0x049c
Tach Channel 5, Virtual Tach 4, Time Stamp: 1182( 301183 )0x049e
Tach Channel 6, Virtual Tach 1,
Tach Channel 6, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 6, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 6, Virtual Tach 4,

Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:

1206(
1208(
1210(
1212(

301207 )0x04b6
301209 )0x04b8
301211 )0x04ba
301213 )0x04bc

Tach Channel 7, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 7, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 7, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 7, Virtual Tach 4,

Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:

1236(
1238(
1240(
1242(

301237 )0x04d4
301239 )0x04d6
301241 )0x04d8
301243 )0x04da

Tach Channel 8, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 8, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 8, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 8, Virtual Tach 4,

Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:

1266(
1268(
1270(
1272(

301267 )0x04f2
301269 )0x04f4
301271 )0x04f6
301273 )0x04f8

Tach Channel 9, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 9, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 9, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 9, Virtual Tach 4,

Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:

1296(
1298(
1300(
1302(

301297 )0x0510
301299 )0x0512
301301 )0x0514
301303 )0x0516

Tach Channel 10, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 10, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 10, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 10, Virtual Tach 4,

Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:

1326(
1328(
1330(
1332(

301327 )0x052e
301329 )0x0530
301331 )0x0532
301333 )0x0534

Tach Channel 11, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 11, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 11, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 11, Virtual Tach 4,

Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:

1356(
1358(
1360(
1362(

301357 )0x054c
301359 )0x054e
301361 )0x0550
301363 )0x0552

J-27

J-28

Tach Channel 12, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 12, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 12, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 12, Virtual Tach 4,

Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:

1386(
1388(
1390(
1392(

301387 )0x056a
301389 )0x056c
301391 )0x056e
301393 )0x0570

Tach Channel 13, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 13, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 13, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 13, Virtual Tach 4,

Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:

1416(
1418(
1420(
1422(

301417 )0x0588
301419 )0x058a
301421 )0x058c
301423 )0x058e

Tach Channel 14, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 14, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 14, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 14, Virtual Tach 4,

Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:

1446(
1448(
1450(
1452(

301447 )0x05a6
301449 )0x05a8
301451 )0x05aa
301453 )0x05ac

Tach Channel 15, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 15, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 15, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 15, Virtual Tach 4,

Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:

1476(
1478(
1480(
1482(

301477 )0x05c4
301479 )0x05c6
301481 )0x05c8
301483 )0x05ca

Tach Channel 16, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 16, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 16, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 16, Virtual Tach 4,

Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:
Time Stamp:

1506(
1508(
1510(
1512(

301507 )0x05e2
301509 )0x05e4
301511 )0x05e6
301513 )0x05e8

Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel

301537 )0x0600
301538 )0x0601
301539 )0x0602
301540 )0x0603
301541 )0x0604
301542 )0x0605
301543 )0x0606
301544 )0x0607

1 Quality: 1536(
2 Quality: 1537(
3 Quality: 1538(
4 Quality: 1539(
5 Quality: 1540(
6 Quality: 1541(
7 Quality: 1542(
8 Quality: 1543(

Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel

9 Quality: 1544(
10 Quality: 1545(
11 Quality: 1546(
12 Quality: 1547(
13 Quality: 1548(
14 Quality: 1549(
15 Quality: 1550(
16 Quality: 1551(

301545 )0x0608
301546 )0x0609
301547 )0x060a
301548 )0x060b
301549 )0x060c
301550 )0x060d
301551 )0x060e
301552 )0x060f

Tach Channel 1, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 1, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 1, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 1, Virtual Tach 4,

Quality:
Quality:
Quality:
Quality:

1552(
1553(
1554(
1555(

301553 )0x0610
301554 )0x0611
301555 )0x0612
301556 )0x0613

Tach Channel 2, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 2, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 2, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 2, Virtual Tach 4,

Quality:
Quality:
Quality:
Quality:

1567(
1568(
1569(
1570(

301568 )0x061f
301569 )0x0620
301570 )0x0621
301571 )0x0622

Tach Channel 3, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 3, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 3, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 3, Virtual Tach 4,

Quality:
Quality:
Quality:
Quality:

1582(
1583(
1584(
1585(

301583 )0x062e
301584 )0x062f
301585 )0x0630
301586 )0x0631

Tach Channel 4, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 4, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 4, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 4, Virtual Tach 4,

Quality:
Quality:
Quality:
Quality:

1597(
1598(
1599(
1600(

301598 )0x063d
301599 )0x063e
301600 )0x063f
301601 )0x0640

Tach Channel 5, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 5, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 5, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 5, Virtual Tach 4,

Quality:
Quality:
Quality:
Quality:

1612(
1613(
1614(
1615(

301613 )0x064c
301614 )0x064d
301615 )0x064e
301616 )0x064f

J-29

J-30

Tach Channel 6, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 6, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 6, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 6, Virtual Tach 4,

Quality:
Quality:
Quality:
Quality:

1627(
1628(
1629(
1630(

301628 )0x065b
301629 )0x065c
301630 )0x065d
301631 )0x065e

Tach Channel 7, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 7, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 7, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 7, Virtual Tach 4,

Quality:
Quality:
Quality:
Quality:

1642(
1643(
1644(
1645(

301643 )0x066a
301644 )0x066b
301645 )0x066c
301646 )0x066d

Tach Channel 8, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 8, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 8, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 8, Virtual Tach 4,

Quality:
Quality:
Quality:
Quality:

1657(
1658(
1659(
1660(

301658 )0x0679
301659 )0x067a
301660 )0x067b
301661 )0x067c

Tach Channel 9, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 9, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 9, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 9, Virtual Tach 4,

Quality:
Quality:
Quality:
Quality:

1672(
1673(
1674(
1675(

301673 )0x0688
301674 )0x0689
301675 )0x068a
301676 )0x068b

Tach Channel 10, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 10, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 10, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 10, Virtual Tach 4,

Quality:
Quality:
Quality:
Quality:

1687(
1688(
1689(
1690(

301688 )0x0697
301689 )0x0698
301690 )0x0699
301691 )0x069a

Tach Channel 11, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 11, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 11, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 11, Virtual Tach 4,

Quality:
Quality:
Quality:
Quality:

1702(
1703(
1704(
1705(

301703 )0x06a6
301704 )0x06a7
301705 )0x06a8
301706 )0x06a9

Tach Channel 12, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 12, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 12, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 12, Virtual Tach 4,

Quality:
Quality:
Quality:
Quality:

1717(
1718(
1719(
1720(

301718 )0x06b5
301719 )0x06b6
301720 )0x06b7
301721 )0x06b8

Tach Channel 13, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 13, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 13, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 13, Virtual Tach 4,

Quality:
Quality:
Quality:
Quality:

1732(
1733(
1734(
1735(

301733 )0x06c4
301734 )0x06c5
301735 )0x06c6
301736 )0x06c7

Tach Channel 14, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 14, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 14, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 14, Virtual Tach 4,

Quality:
Quality:
Quality:
Quality:

1747(
1748(
1749(
1750(

301748 )0x06d3
301749 )0x06d4
301750 )0x06d5
301751 )0x06d6

Tach Channel 15, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 15, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 15, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 15, Virtual Tach 4,

Quality:
Quality:
Quality:
Quality:

1762(
1763(
1764(
1765(

301763 )0x06e2
301764 )0x06e3
301765 )0x06e4
301766 )0x06e5

Tach Channel 16, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 16, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 16, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 16, Virtual Tach 4,

Quality:
Quality:
Quality:
Quality:

1777(
1778(
1779(
1780(

301778 )0x06f1
301779 )0x06f2
301780 )0x06f3
301781 )0x06f4

Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel
Tach Channel

1 Alarm Status: 1792(


2 Alarm Status: 1793(
3 Alarm Status: 1794(
4 Alarm Status: 1795(
5 Alarm Status: 1796(
6 Alarm Status: 1797(
7 Alarm Status: 1798(
8 Alarm Status: 1799(
9 Alarm Status: 1800(
10 Alarm Status: 1801(
11 Alarm Status: 1802(
12 Alarm Status: 1803(
13 Alarm Status: 1804(

301793 )0x0700
301794 )0x0701
301795 )0x0702
301796 )0x0703
301797 )0x0704
301798 )0x0705
301799 )0x0706
301800 )0x0707
301801 )0x0708
301802 )0x0709
301803 )0x070a
301804 )0x070b
301805 )0x070c

J-31

Tach Channel 14 Alarm Status: 1805( 301806 )0x070d


Tach Channel 15 Alarm Status: 1806( 301807 )0x070e
Tach Channel 16 Alarm Status: 1807( 301808 )0x070f

J-32

Tach Channel 1, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 1, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 1, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 1, Virtual Tach 4,

Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:

1808(
1809(
1810(
1811(

301809 )0x0710
301810 )0x0711
301811 )0x0712
301812 )0x0713

Tach Channel 2, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 2, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 2, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 2, Virtual Tach 4,

Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:

1823(
1824(
1825(
1826(

301824 )0x071f
301825 )0x0720
301826 )0x0721
301827 )0x0722

Tach Channel 3, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 3, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 3, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 3, Virtual Tach 4,

Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:

1838(
1839(
1840(
1841(

301839 )0x072e
301840 )0x072f
301841 )0x0730
301842 )0x0731

Tach Channel 4, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 4, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 4, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 4, Virtual Tach 4,

Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:

1853(
1854(
1855(
1856(

301854 )0x073d
301855 )0x073e
301856 )0x073f
301857 )0x0740

Tach Channel 5, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 5, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 5, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 5, Virtual Tach 4,

Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:

1868(
1869(
1870(
1871(

301869 )0x074c
301870 )0x074d
301871 )0x074e
301872 )0x074f

Tach Channel 6, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 6, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 6, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 6, Virtual Tach 4,

Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:

1883(
1884(
1885(
1886(

301884 )0x075b
301885 )0x075c
301886 )0x075d
301887 )0x075e

Tach Channel 7, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 7, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 7, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 7, Virtual Tach 4,

Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:

1898(
1899(
1900(
1901(

301899 )0x076a
301900 )0x076b
301901 )0x076c
301902 )0x076d

Tach Channel 8, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 8, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 8, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 8, Virtual Tach 4,

Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:

1913(
1914(
1915(
1916(

301914 )0x0779
301915 )0x077a
301916 )0x077b
301917 )0x077c

Tach Channel 9, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 9, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 9, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 9, Virtual Tach 4,

Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:

1928(
1929(
1930(
1931(

301929 )0x0788
301930 )0x0789
301931 )0x078a
301932 )0x078b

Tach Channel 10, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 10, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 10, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 10, Virtual Tach 4,

Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:

1943(
1944(
1945(
1946(

301944 )0x0797
301945 )0x0798
301946 )0x0799
301947 )0x079a

Tach Channel 11, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 11, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 11, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 11, Virtual Tach 4,

Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:

1958(
1959(
1960(
1961(

301959 )0x07a6
301960 )0x07a7
301961 )0x07a8
301962 )0x07a9

Tach Channel 12, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 12, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 12, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 12, Virtual Tach 4,

Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:

1973(
1974(
1975(
1976(

301974 )0x07b5
301975 )0x07b6
301976 )0x07b7
301977 )0x07b8

Tach Channel 13, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 13, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 13, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 13, Virtual Tach 4,

Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:

1988(
1989(
1990(
1991(

301989 )0x07c4
301990 )0x07c5
301991 )0x07c6
301992 )0x07c7

J-33

J-34

Tach Channel 14, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 14, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 14, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 14, Virtual Tach 4,

Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:

2003(
2004(
2005(
2006(

302004 )0x07d3
302005 )0x07d4
302006 )0x07d5
302007 )0x07d6

Tach Channel 15, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 15, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 15, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 15, Virtual Tach 4,

Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:

2018(
2019(
2020(
2021(

302019 )0x07e2
302020 )0x07e3
302021 )0x07e4
302022 )0x07e5

Tach Channel 16, Virtual Tach 1,


Tach Channel 16, Virtual Tach 2,
Tach Channel 16, Virtual Tach 3,
Tach Channel 16, Virtual Tach 4,

Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:
Alarm Status:

2033(
2034(
2035(
2036(

302034 )0x07f1
302035 )0x07f2
302036 )0x07f3
302037 )0x07f4

System Information
Main Processor IP Address3072( 303073 )0x0c00
Transient Processor IP Address3074( 303075 )0x0c02
Host PC IP Address3072( 303073 )0x0c00
Main Processor Mac Address3078( 303079 )0x0c06
Transient Processor Mac Address3081( 303082 )0x0c09
Oldest Transient Data Time Stamp3084( 303085 )0x0c0c
Newest Transient Data Time Stamp3086( 303087 )0x0c0e
Hardware Status Flags 3216( 303217 )0x0c90
Firmware Status Flags 3218( 303219 )0x0c92
System Status Flags 3220( 303221 )0x0c94
Watch Dog Timer 3222( 303223 )0x0c96
Output Relay Mask 3223( 303224 )0x0c97
Input Relay Mask 3224( 303225 )0x0c98
Number of Internal Relays 3225( 303226 )0x0c99
Configuration Time Stamp 3226( 303227 )0x0c9a

J-35

CSI 4500 Analysis Parameter order by Channel and Data Collection Sets
Channel 1 - Data Collection Set 1: 4096 ( 304097 )0x1000
Offset from base Address:
AP Value # 1: 0000 ( 0 ):
AP Value # 2: 0002 ( 2 ):
AP Value # 3: 0004 ( 4 ):
AP Value # 4: 0006 ( 6 ):
AP Value # 5: 0008 ( 8 ):
AP Value # 6: 000a ( 10 ):
AP Value # 7: 000c ( 12 ):
AP Value # 8: 000e ( 14 ):
AP Value # 9: 0010 ( 16 ):
AP Value #10:0012 ( 18 ):
AP Value #11:0014 ( 20 ):
AP Value #12:0016 ( 22 ):
AP Value #13:0018 ( 24 ):
AP Value #14:001a ( 26 ):
AP Value #15:001c ( 28 ):
AP Value #16:001e ( 30 ):
AP Value #17:0020 ( 32 ):
AP Value #18:0022 ( 34 ):
AP Value #19:0024 ( 36 ):
AP Value #20:0026 ( 38 ):
AP Value #21:0028 ( 40 ):
AP Value #22:002a ( 42 ):
AP Value #23:002c ( 44 ):
AP Value #24:002e ( 46 ):
AP Alarm Status# 1:0030 ( 48 ):
AP Alarm Status# 2:0031 ( 49 ):
AP Alarm Status# 3:0032 ( 50 ):
AP Alarm Status# 4:0033 ( 51 ):
AP Alarm Status# 5:0034 ( 52 ):
AP Alarm Status# 6:0035 ( 53 ):
AP Alarm Status# 7:0036 ( 54 ):

J-36

AP Alarm Status# 8:0037 ( 55 ):


AP Alarm Status# 9:0038 ( 56 ):
AP Alarm Status#10:0039 ( 57 ):
AP Alarm Status#11:003a ( 58 ):
AP Alarm Status#12:003b ( 59 ):
AP Alarm Status#13:003c ( 60 ):
AP Alarm Status#14:003d ( 61 ):
AP Alarm Status#15:003e ( 62 ):
AP Alarm Status#16:003f ( 63 ):
AP Alarm Status#17:0040 ( 64 ):
AP Alarm Status#18:0041 ( 65 ):
AP Alarm Status#19:0042 ( 66 ):
AP Alarm Status#20:0043 ( 67 ):
AP Alarm Status#21:0044 ( 68 ):
AP Alarm Status#22:0045 ( 69 ):
AP Alarm Status#23:0046 ( 70 ):
AP Alarm Status#24:0047 ( 71 ):
AP TimeStamp:0048 ( 72 ):
AP PredicateState:004a ( 74 ):
Channel 2 - Data Collection Set 1: 4192(
Channel 3 - Data Collection Set 1: 4288(
Channel 4 - Data Collection Set 1: 4384(
Channel 5 - Data Collection Set 1: 4480(
Channel 6 - Data Collection Set 1: 4576(
Channel 7 - Data Collection Set 1: 4672(
Channel 8 - Data Collection Set 1: 4768(
Channel 9 - Data Collection Set 1: 4864(
Channel 10 - Data Collection Set 1: 4960(
Channel 11 - Data Collection Set 1: 5056(
Channel 12 - Data Collection Set 1: 5152(
Channel 13 - Data Collection Set 1: 5248(
Channel 14 - Data Collection Set 1: 5344(
Channel 15 - Data Collection Set 1: 5440(

304193 )0x1060
304289 )0x10c0
304385 )0x1120
304481 )0x1180
304577 )0x11e0
304673 )0x1240
304769 )0x12a0
304865 )0x1300
304961 )0x1360
305057 )0x13c0
305153 )0x1420
305249 )0x1480
305345 )0x14e0
305441 )0x1540

J-37

Channel 16
Channel 17
Channel 18
Channel 19
Channel 20
Channel 21
Channel 22
Channel 23
Channel 24
Channel 25
Channel 26
Channel 27
Channel 28
Channel 29
Channel 30
Channel 31
Channel 32

J-38

- Data Collection Set


- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set

1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:

5536(
5632(
5728(
5824(
5920(
6016(
6112(
6208(
6304(
6400(
6496(
6592(
6688(
6784(
6880(
6976(
7072(

305537 )0x15a0
305633 )0x1600
305729 )0x1660
305825 )0x16c0
305921 )0x1720
306017 )0x1780
306113 )0x17e0
306209 )0x1840
306305 )0x18a0
306401 )0x1900
306497 )0x1960
306593 )0x19c0
306689 )0x1a20
306785 )0x1a80
306881 )0x1ae0
306977 )0x1b40
307073 )0x1ba0

Channel 1 - Data Collection Set 2: 7168(


Channel 2 - Data Collection Set 2: 7264(
Channel 3 - Data Collection Set 2: 7360(
Channel 4 - Data Collection Set 2: 7456(
Channel 5 - Data Collection Set 2: 7552(
Channel 6 - Data Collection Set 2: 7648(
Channel 7 - Data Collection Set 2: 7744(
Channel 8 - Data Collection Set 2: 7840(
Channel 9 - Data Collection Set 2: 7936(
Channel 10 - Data Collection Set 2: 8032(
Channel 11 - Data Collection Set 2: 8128(
Channel 12 - Data Collection Set 2: 8224(
Channel 13 - Data Collection Set 2: 8320(
Channel 14 - Data Collection Set 2: 8416(
Channel 15 - Data Collection Set 2: 8512(
Channel 16 - Data Collection Set 2: 8608(

307169 )0x1c00
307265 )0x1c60
307361 )0x1cc0
307457 )0x1d20
307553 )0x1d80
307649 )0x1de0
307745 )0x1e40
307841 )0x1ea0
307937 )0x1f00
308033 )0x1f60
308129 )0x1fc0
308225 )0x2020
308321 )0x2080
308417 )0x20e0
308513 )0x2140
308609 )0x21a0

Channel 17
Channel 18
Channel 19
Channel 20
Channel 21
Channel 22
Channel 23
Channel 24
Channel 25
Channel 26
Channel 27
Channel 28
Channel 29
Channel 30
Channel 31
Channel 32

- Data Collection Set


- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set

2: 8704(
2: 8800(
2: 8896(
2: 8992(
2: 9088(
2: 9184(
2: 9280(
2: 9376(
2: 9472(
2: 9568(
2: 9664(
2: 9760(
2: 9856(
2: 9952(
2: 10048(
2: 10144(

308705 )0x2200
308801 )0x2260
308897 )0x22c0
308993 )0x2320
309089 )0x2380
309185 )0x23e0
309281 )0x2440
309377 )0x24a0
309473 )0x2500
309569 )0x2560
309665 )0x25c0
309761 )0x2620
309857 )0x2680
309953 )0x26e0
310049 )0x2740
310145 )0x27a0

Channel 1 - Data Collection Set 3: 10240(


Channel 2 - Data Collection Set 3: 10336(
Channel 3 - Data Collection Set 3: 10432(
Channel 4 - Data Collection Set 3: 10528(
Channel 5 - Data Collection Set 3: 10624(
Channel 6 - Data Collection Set 3: 10720(
Channel 7 - Data Collection Set 3: 10816(
Channel 8 - Data Collection Set 3: 10912(
Channel 9 - Data Collection Set 3: 11008(
Channel 10 - Data Collection Set 3: 11104(
Channel 11 - Data Collection Set 3: 11200(
Channel 12 - Data Collection Set 3: 11296(
Channel 13 - Data Collection Set 3: 11392(
Channel 14 - Data Collection Set 3: 11488(
Channel 15 - Data Collection Set 3: 11584(
Channel 16 - Data Collection Set 3: 11680(
Channel 17 - Data Collection Set 3: 11776(

310241 )0x2800
310337 )0x2860
310433 )0x28c0
310529 )0x2920
310625 )0x2980
310721 )0x29e0
310817 )0x2a40
310913 )0x2aa0
311009 )0x2b00
311105 )0x2b60
311201 )0x2bc0
311297 )0x2c20
311393 )0x2c80
311489 )0x2ce0
311585 )0x2d40
311681 )0x2da0
311777 )0x2e00

J-39

Channel 18
Channel 19
Channel 20
Channel 21
Channel 22
Channel 23
Channel 24
Channel 25
Channel 26
Channel 27
Channel 28
Channel 29
Channel 30
Channel 31
Channel 32

J-40

- Data Collection Set


- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set

3: 11872(
3: 11968(
3: 12064(
3: 12160(
3: 12256(
3: 12352(
3: 12448(
3: 12544(
3: 12640(
3: 12736(
3: 12832(
3: 12928(
3: 13024(
3: 13120(
3: 13216(

311873 )0x2e60
311969 )0x2ec0
312065 )0x2f20
312161 )0x2f80
312257 )0x2fe0
312353 )0x3040
312449 )0x30a0
312545 )0x3100
312641 )0x3160
312737 )0x31c0
312833 )0x3220
312929 )0x3280
313025 )0x32e0
313121 )0x3340
313217 )0x33a0

Channel 1 - Data Collection Set 4: 13312(


Channel 2 - Data Collection Set 4: 13408(
Channel 3 - Data Collection Set 4: 13504(
Channel 4 - Data Collection Set 4: 13600(
Channel 5 - Data Collection Set 4: 13696(
Channel 6 - Data Collection Set 4: 13792(
Channel 7 - Data Collection Set 4: 13888(
Channel 8 - Data Collection Set 4: 13984(
Channel 9 - Data Collection Set 4: 14080(
Channel 10 - Data Collection Set 4: 14176(
Channel 11 - Data Collection Set 4: 14272(
Channel 12 - Data Collection Set 4: 14368(
Channel 13 - Data Collection Set 4: 14464(
Channel 14 - Data Collection Set 4: 14560(
Channel 15 - Data Collection Set 4: 14656(
Channel 16 - Data Collection Set 4: 14752(
Channel 17 - Data Collection Set 4: 14848(
Channel 18 - Data Collection Set 4: 14944(

313313 )0x3400
313409 )0x3460
313505 )0x34c0
313601 )0x3520
313697 )0x3580
313793 )0x35e0
313889 )0x3640
313985 )0x36a0
314081 )0x3700
314177 )0x3760
314273 )0x37c0
314369 )0x3820
314465 )0x3880
314561 )0x38e0
314657 )0x3940
314753 )0x39a0
314849 )0x3a00
314945 )0x3a60

Channel 19 - Data Collection Set 4: 15040(


Channel 20 - Data Collection Set 4: 15136(
Channel 21 - Data Collection Set 4: 15232(
Channel 22 - Data Collection Set 4: 15328(
Channel 23 - Data Collection Set 4: 15424(
Channel 24 - Data Collection Set 4: 15520(
Channel 25 - Data Collection Set 4: 15616(
Channel 26 - Data Collection Set 4: 15712(
Channel 27 - Data Collection Set 4: 15808(
Channel 28 - Data Collection Set 4: 15904(
Channel 29 - Data Collection Set 4: 16000(
Channel 30 - Data Collection Set 4: 16096(
Channel 31 - Data Collection Set 4: 16192(
Channel 32 - Data Collection Set 4: 16288(
Channel 1 - Data Collection Set 5: 16384(
Channel 2 - Data Collection Set 5: 16480(
Channel 3 - Data Collection Set 5: 16576(
Channel 4 - Data Collection Set 5: 16672(
Channel 5 - Data Collection Set 5: 16768(
Channel 6 - Data Collection Set 5: 16864(
Channel 7 - Data Collection Set 5: 16960(
Channel 8 - Data Collection Set 5: 17056(
Channel 9 - Data Collection Set 5: 17152(
Channel 10 - Data Collection Set 5: 17248(
Channel 11 - Data Collection Set 5: 17344(
Channel 12 - Data Collection Set 5: 17440(
Channel 13 - Data Collection Set 5: 17536(
Channel 14 - Data Collection Set 5: 17632(
Channel 15 - Data Collection Set 5: 17728(
Channel 16 - Data Collection Set 5: 17824(
Channel 17 - Data Collection Set 5: 17920(
Channel 18 - Data Collection Set 5: 18016(
Channel 19 - Data Collection Set 5: 18112(
Channel 20 - Data Collection Set 5: 18208(

315041 )0x3ac0
315137 )0x3b20
315233 )0x3b80
315329 )0x3be0
315425 )0x3c40
315521 )0x3ca0
315617 )0x3d00
315713 )0x3d60
315809 )0x3dc0
315905 )0x3e20
316001 )0x3e80
316097 )0x3ee0
316193 )0x3f40
316289 )0x3fa0
316385 )0x4000
316481 )0x4060
316577 )0x40c0
316673 )0x4120
316769 )0x4180
316865 )0x41e0
316961 )0x4240
317057 )0x42a0
317153 )0x4300
317249 )0x4360
317345 )0x43c0
317441 )0x4420
317537 )0x4480
317633 )0x44e0
317729 )0x4540
317825 )0x45a0
317921 )0x4600
318017 )0x4660
318113 )0x46c0
318209 )0x4720

J-41

Channel 21
Channel 22
Channel 23
Channel 24
Channel 25
Channel 26
Channel 27
Channel 28
Channel 29
Channel 30
Channel 31
Channel 32

J-42

- Data Collection Set


- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set

5: 18304(
5: 18400(
5: 18496(
5: 18592(
5: 18688(
5: 18784(
5: 18880(
5: 18976(
5: 19072(
5: 19168(
5: 19264(
5: 19360(

318305 )0x4780
318401 )0x47e0
318497 )0x4840
318593 )0x48a0
318689 )0x4900
318785 )0x4960
318881 )0x49c0
318977 )0x4a20
319073 )0x4a80
319169 )0x4ae0
319265 )0x4b40
319361 )0x4ba0

Channel 1 - Data Collection Set 6: 19456(


Channel 2 - Data Collection Set 6: 19552(
Channel 3 - Data Collection Set 6: 19648(
Channel 4 - Data Collection Set 6: 19744(
Channel 5 - Data Collection Set 6: 19840(
Channel 6 - Data Collection Set 6: 19936(
Channel 7 - Data Collection Set 6: 20032(
Channel 8 - Data Collection Set 6: 20128(
Channel 9 - Data Collection Set 6: 20224(
Channel 10 - Data Collection Set 6: 20320(
Channel 11 - Data Collection Set 6: 20416(
Channel 12 - Data Collection Set 6: 20512(
Channel 13 - Data Collection Set 6: 20608(
Channel 14 - Data Collection Set 6: 20704(
Channel 15 - Data Collection Set 6: 20800(
Channel 16 - Data Collection Set 6: 20896(
Channel 17 - Data Collection Set 6: 20992(
Channel 18 - Data Collection Set 6: 21088(
Channel 19 - Data Collection Set 6: 21184(
Channel 20 - Data Collection Set 6: 21280(
Channel 21 - Data Collection Set 6: 21376(

319457 )0x4c00
319553 )0x4c60
319649 )0x4cc0
319745 )0x4d20
319841 )0x4d80
319937 )0x4de0
320033 )0x4e40
320129 )0x4ea0
320225 )0x4f00
320321 )0x4f60
320417 )0x4fc0
320513 )0x5020
320609 )0x5080
320705 )0x50e0
320801 )0x5140
320897 )0x51a0
320993 )0x5200
321089 )0x5260
321185 )0x52c0
321281 )0x5320
321377 )0x5380

Channel 22
Channel 23
Channel 24
Channel 25
Channel 26
Channel 27
Channel 28
Channel 29
Channel 30
Channel 31
Channel 32

- Data Collection Set


- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set

6: 21472(
6: 21568(
6: 21664(
6: 21760(
6: 21856(
6: 21952(
6: 22048(
6: 22144(
6: 22240(
6: 22336(
6: 22432(

321473 )0x53e0
321569 )0x5440
321665 )0x54a0
321761 )0x5500
321857 )0x5560
321953 )0x55c0
322049 )0x5620
322145 )0x5680
322241 )0x56e0
322337 )0x5740
322433 )0x57a0

Channel 1 - Data Collection Set 7: 22528(


Channel 2 - Data Collection Set 7: 22624(
Channel 3 - Data Collection Set 7: 22720(
Channel 4 - Data Collection Set 7: 22816(
Channel 5 - Data Collection Set 7: 22912(
Channel 6 - Data Collection Set 7: 23008(
Channel 7 - Data Collection Set 7: 23104(
Channel 8 - Data Collection Set 7: 23200(
Channel 9 - Data Collection Set 7: 23296(
Channel 10 - Data Collection Set 7: 23392(
Channel 11 - Data Collection Set 7: 23488(
Channel 12 - Data Collection Set 7: 23584(
Channel 13 - Data Collection Set 7: 23680(
Channel 14 - Data Collection Set 7: 23776(
Channel 15 - Data Collection Set 7: 23872(
Channel 16 - Data Collection Set 7: 23968(
Channel 17 - Data Collection Set 7: 24064(
Channel 18 - Data Collection Set 7: 24160(
Channel 19 - Data Collection Set 7: 24256(
Channel 20 - Data Collection Set 7: 24352(
Channel 21 - Data Collection Set 7: 24448(
Channel 22 - Data Collection Set 7: 24544(

322529 )0x5800
322625 )0x5860
322721 )0x58c0
322817 )0x5920
322913 )0x5980
323009 )0x59e0
323105 )0x5a40
323201 )0x5aa0
323297 )0x5b00
323393 )0x5b60
323489 )0x5bc0
323585 )0x5c20
323681 )0x5c80
323777 )0x5ce0
323873 )0x5d40
323969 )0x5da0
324065 )0x5e00
324161 )0x5e60
324257 )0x5ec0
324353 )0x5f20
324449 )0x5f80
324545 )0x5fe0

J-43

Channel 23
Channel 24
Channel 25
Channel 26
Channel 27
Channel 28
Channel 29
Channel 30
Channel 31
Channel 32

J-44

- Data Collection Set


- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set

7: 24640(
7: 24736(
7: 24832(
7: 24928(
7: 25024(
7: 25120(
7: 25216(
7: 25312(
7: 25408(
7: 25504(

324641 )0x6040
324737 )0x60a0
324833 )0x6100
324929 )0x6160
325025 )0x61c0
325121 )0x6220
325217 )0x6280
325313 )0x62e0
325409 )0x6340
325505 )0x63a0

CSI 6500 Analysis Parameter order by Channel and Data Collection Sets
Channel 1 - Data Collection Set 1: 4096 ( 304097 )0x1000
Offset from base Address:
AP Value # 1: 0000 ( 0 ):
AP Value # 2: 0002 ( 2 ):
AP Value # 3: 0004 ( 4 ):
AP Value # 4: 0006 ( 6 ):
AP Value # 5: 0008 ( 8 ):
AP Value # 6: 000a ( 10 ):
AP Value # 7: 000c ( 12 ):
AP Value # 8: 000e ( 14 ):
AP Value # 9: 0010 ( 16 ):
AP Value #10:0012 ( 18 ):
AP Value #11:0014 ( 20 ):
AP Value #12:0016 ( 22 ):
AP Value #13:0018 ( 24 ):
AP Value #14:001a ( 26 ):
AP Value #15:001c ( 28 ):
AP Value #16:001e ( 30 ):
AP Value #17:0020 ( 32 ):
AP Value #18:0022 ( 34 ):
AP Value #19:0024 ( 36 ):
AP Value #20:0026 ( 38 ):
AP Value #21:0028 ( 40 ):
AP Value #22:002a ( 42 ):
AP Value #23:002c ( 44 ):
AP Value #24:002e ( 46 ):
AP Alarm Status# 1:0030 ( 48 ):
AP Alarm Status# 2:0031 ( 49 ):
AP Alarm Status# 3:0032 ( 50 ):
AP Alarm Status# 4:0033 ( 51 ):
AP Alarm Status# 5:0034 ( 52 ):
AP Alarm Status# 6:0035 ( 53 ):
AP Alarm Status# 7:0036 ( 54 ):

J-45

AP Alarm Status# 8:0037 ( 55 ):


AP Alarm Status# 9:0038 ( 56 ):
AP Alarm Status#10:0039 ( 57 ):
AP Alarm Status#11:003a ( 58 ):
AP Alarm Status#12:003b ( 59 ):
AP Alarm Status#13:003c ( 60 ):
AP Alarm Status#14:003d ( 61 ):
AP Alarm Status#15:003e ( 62 ):
AP Alarm Status#16:003f ( 63 ):
AP Alarm Status#17:0040 ( 64 ):
AP Alarm Status#18:0041 ( 65 ):
AP Alarm Status#19:0042 ( 66 ):
AP Alarm Status#20:0043 ( 67 ):
AP Alarm Status#21:0044 ( 68 ):
AP Alarm Status#22:0045 ( 69 ):
AP Alarm Status#23:0046 ( 70 ):
AP Alarm Status#24:0047 ( 71 ):
AP TimeStamp:0048 ( 72 ):
AP PredicateState:004a ( 74 ):
Channel 2 - Data Collection Set 1: 4192
Channel 3 - Data Collection Set 1: 4288
Channel 4 - Data Collection Set 1: 4384
Channel 5 - Data Collection Set 1: 4480
Channel 6 - Data Collection Set 1: 4576
Channel 7 - Data Collection Set 1: 4672
Channel 8 - Data Collection Set 1: 4768
Channel 9 - Data Collection Set 1: 4864
Channel 10 - Data Collection Set 1: 4960
Channel 11 - Data Collection Set 1: 5056
Channel 12 - Data Collection Set 1: 5152
Channel 13 - Data Collection Set 1: 5248
Channel 14 - Data Collection Set 1: 5344
Channel 15 - Data Collection Set 1: 5440

J-46

( 304193 )
( 304289 )
( 304385 )
( 304481 )
( 304577 )
( 304673 )
( 304769 )
( 304865 )
( 304961 )
( 305057 )
( 305153 )
( 305249 )
( 305345 )
( 305441 )

Channel 16
Channel 17
Channel 18
Channel 19
Channel 20
Channel 21
Channel 22
Channel 23
Channel 24

- Data Collection Set


- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set

1: 5536
1: 5632
1: 5728
1: 5824
1: 5920
1: 6016
1: 6112
1: 6208
1: 6304

Channel 1 - Data Collection Set 2: 6400


Channel 2 - Data Collection Set 2: 6496
Channel 3 - Data Collection Set 2: 6592
Channel 4 - Data Collection Set 2: 6688
Channel 5 - Data Collection Set 2: 6784
Channel 6 - Data Collection Set 2: 6880
Channel 7 - Data Collection Set 2: 6976
Channel 8 - Data Collection Set 2: 7072
Channel 9 - Data Collection Set 2: 7168
Channel 10 - Data Collection Set 2: 7264
Channel 11 - Data Collection Set 2: 7360
Channel 12 - Data Collection Set 2: 7456
Channel 13 - Data Collection Set 2: 7552
Channel 14 - Data Collection Set 2: 7648
Channel 15 - Data Collection Set 2: 7744
Channel 16 - Data Collection Set 2: 7840
Channel 17 - Data Collection Set 2: 7936
Channel 18 - Data Collection Set 2: 8032
Channel 19 - Data Collection Set 2: 8128
Channel 20 - Data Collection Set 2: 8224
Channel 21 - Data Collection Set 2: 8320
Channel 22 - Data Collection Set 2: 8416
Channel 23 - Data Collection Set 2: 8512
Channel 24 - Data Collection Set 2: 8608

(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(

305537 )
305633 )
305729 )
305825 )
305921 )
306017 )
306113 )
306209 )
306305 )

( 306401 )
( 306497 )
( 306593 )
( 306689 )
( 306785 )
( 306881 )
( 306977 )
( 307073 )
( 307169 )
( 307265 )
( 307361 )
( 307457 )
( 307553 )
( 307649 )
( 307745 )
( 307841 )
( 307937 )
( 308033 )
( 308129 )
( 308225 )
( 308321 )
( 308417 )
( 308513 )
( 308609 )

J-47

Channel 1 - Data Collection Set 3:8704 ( 308705 )


Channel 2 - Data Collection Set 3: 8800 ( 308801 )
Channel 3 - Data Collection Set 3: 8896 ( 308897 )
Channel 4 - Data Collection Set 3: 8992 ( 308993 )
Channel 5 - Data Collection Set 3: 9088 ( 309089 )
Channel 6 - Data Collection Set 3: 9184 ( 309185 )
Channel 7 - Data Collection Set 3: 9280 ( 309281 )
Channel 8 - Data Collection Set 3: 9376 ( 309377 )
Channel 9 - Data Collection Set 3: 9472 ( 309473 )
Channel 10 - Data Collection Set 3:9568 ( 309569 )
Channel 11 - Data Collection Set 3:9664 ( 309665 )
Channel 12 - Data Collection Set 3:9760 ( 309761 )
Channel 13 - Data Collection Set 3:9856 ( 309857 )
Channel 14 - Data Collection Set 3:9952 ( 309953 )
Channel 15 - Data Collection Set 3: 10048 ( 310049 )
Channel 16 - Data Collection Set 3: 10144 ( 310145 )
Channel 17 - Data Collection Set 3: 10240 ( 310241 )
Channel 18 - Data Collection Set 3: 10336 ( 310337 )
Channel 19 - Data Collection Set 3: 10432 ( 310433 )
Channel 20 - Data Collection Set 3: 10528 ( 310529 )
Channel 21 - Data Collection Set 3: 10624 ( 310625 )
Channel 22 - Data Collection Set 3: 10720 ( 310721 )
Channel 23 - Data Collection Set 3: 10816 ( 310817 )
Channel 24 - Data Collection Set 3: 10912 ( 310913 )
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel

J-48

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

- Data Collection Set


- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set

4: 11008
4: 11104
4: 11200
4: 11296
4: 11392
4: 11488
4: 11584
4: 11680

(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(

311009 )
311105 )
311201 )
311297 )
311393 )
311489 )
311585 )
311681 )

Channel 9 - Data Collection Set 4: 11776


Channel 10 - Data Collection Set 4:11872
Channel 11 - Data Collection Set 4:11968
Channel 12 - Data Collection Set 4:12064
Channel 13 - Data Collection Set 4:12160
Channel 14 - Data Collection Set 4:12256
Channel 15 - Data Collection Set 4: 12352
Channel 16 - Data Collection Set 4: 12448
Channel 17 - Data Collection Set 4: 12544
Channel 18 - Data Collection Set 4: 12640
Channel 19 - Data Collection Set 4: 12736
Channel 20 - Data Collection Set 4: 12832
Channel 21 - Data Collection Set 4: 12928
Channel 22 - Data Collection Set 4: 13024
Channel 23 - Data Collection Set 4: 13120
Channel 24 - Data Collection Set 4: 13216

( 311777 )
( 311873 )
( 311969 )
( 312065 )
( 312161 )
( 312257 )
( 312353 )
( 312449 )
( 312545 )
( 312641 )
( 312737 )
( 312833 )
( 312929 )
( 313025 )
( 313121 )
( 313217 )

Channel 1 - Data Collection Set 5: 13312


Channel 2 - Data Collection Set 5: 13408
Channel 3 - Data Collection Set 5: 13504
Channel 4 - Data Collection Set 5: 13600
Channel 5 - Data Collection Set 5: 13696
Channel 6 - Data Collection Set 5: 13792
Channel 7 - Data Collection Set 5: 13888
Channel 8 - Data Collection Set 5: 13984
Channel 9 - Data Collection Set 5: 14080
Channel 10 - Data Collection Set 5:14176
Channel 11 - Data Collection Set 5:14272
Channel 12 - Data Collection Set 5:14368
Channel 13 - Data Collection Set 5:14464
Channel 14 - Data Collection Set 5:14560
Channel 15 - Data Collection Set 5: 14656
Channel 16 - Data Collection Set 5: 14752
Channel 17 - Data Collection Set 5: 14848

( 313313 )
( 313409 )
( 313505 )
( 313601 )
( 313697 )
( 313793 )
( 313889 )
( 313985 )
( 314081 )
( 314177 )
( 314273 )
( 314369 )
( 314465 )
( 314561 )
( 314657 )
( 314753 )
( 314849 )

J-49

Channel 18
Channel 19
Channel 20
Channel 21
Channel 22
Channel 23
Channel 24

- Data Collection Set


- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set
- Data Collection Set

5: 14944
5: 15040
5: 15136
5: 15232
5: 15328
5: 15424
5: 15520

Channel 1 - Data Collection Set 6: 15616


Channel 2 - Data Collection Set 6: 15712
Channel 3 - Data Collection Set 6: 15808
Channel 4 - Data Collection Set 6: 15904
Channel 5 - Data Collection Set 6: 16000
Channel 6 - Data Collection Set 6: 16096
Channel 7 - Data Collection Set 6: 16192
Channel 8 - Data Collection Set 6: 16288
Channel 9 - Data Collection Set 6: 16384
Channel 10 - Data Collection Set 6:16480
Channel 11 - Data Collection Set 6:16576
Channel 12 - Data Collection Set 6:16672
Channel 13 - Data Collection Set 6:16768
Channel 14 - Data Collection Set 6:16864
Channel 15 - Data Collection Set 6: 16960
Channel 16 - Data Collection Set 6: 17056
Channel 17 - Data Collection Set 6: 17152
Channel 18 - Data Collection Set 6: 17248
Channel 19 - Data Collection Set 6: 17344
Channel 20 - Data Collection Set 6: 17440
Channel 21 - Data Collection Set 6: 17536
Channel 22 - Data Collection Set 6: 17632
Channel 23 - Data Collection Set 6: 17728
Channel 24 - Data Collection Set 6: 17824

(
(
(
(
(
(
(

314945 )
315041 )
315137 )
315233 )
315329 )
315425 )
315521 )

( 315617 )
( 315713 )
( 315809 )
( 315905 )
( 316001 )
( 316097 )
( 316193 )
( 316289 )
( 316385 )
( 316481 )
( 316577 )
( 316673 )
( 316769 )
( 316865 )
( 316961 )
( 317057 )
( 317153 )
( 317249 )
( 317345 )
( 317441 )
( 317537 )
( 317633 )
( 317729 )
( 317825 )

Channel 1 - Data Collection Set 7: 17920 ( 317921 )

J-50

Channel 2 - Data Collection Set 7: 18016


Channel 3 - Data Collection Set 7: 18112
Channel 4 - Data Collection Set 7: 18208
Channel 5 - Data Collection Set 7: 18304
Channel 6 - Data Collection Set 7: 18400
Channel 7 - Data Collection Set 7: 18496
Channel 8 - Data Collection Set 7: 18592
Channel 9 - Data Collection Set 7: 18688
Channel 10 - Data Collection Set 7:18784
Channel 11 - Data Collection Set 7:18880
Channel 12 - Data Collection Set 7:18976
Channel 13 - Data Collection Set 7:19072
Channel 14 - Data Collection Set 7:19168
Channel 15 - Data Collection Set 7: 19264
Channel 16 - Data Collection Set 7: 19360
Channel 17 - Data Collection Set 7: 19456
Channel 18 - Data Collection Set 7: 19552
Channel 19 - Data Collection Set 7: 19648
Channel 20 - Data Collection Set 7: 19744
Channel 21 - Data Collection Set 7: 19840
Channel 22 - Data Collection Set 7: 19936
Channel 23 - Data Collection Set 7: 20032
Channel 24 - Data Collection Set 7: 20128

( 318017 )
( 318113 )
( 318209 )
( 318305 )
( 318401 )
( 318497 )
( 318593 )
( 318689 )
( 318785 )
( 318881 )
( 318977 )
( 319073 )
( 319169 )
( 319265 )
( 319361 )
( 319457 )
( 319553 )
( 319649 )
( 319745 )
( 319841 )
( 319937 )
( 320033 )
( 320129 )

J-51

Troubleshooting Modbus Connection Problems


-Verify the Modbus option has been enabled on the CSI 4500 / 6500 (i.e. Enter
showLicensedFeatures from a TelNet or Hyperterminal session).
-Verify the CSI 4500/6500 main processor IP address can be pinged from the PC
running the Modbus Master.
-Verify that the Modbus port is open through any firewalls (typically 502)
-Verify the proper Modbus command is being used (i.e. Input Discrete or Input
Registers)

J-52

Modbus Remapping Function


The Online Modbus Mapping feature provides the ability to map existing CSI 4500 and
CSI 6500 Modbus registers to a user-defined register number and automatically have engineering units (EGU) conversion applied to the mapped measured values. The business
value of this feature is that customers are able to read the Modbus values in contiguous
blocks and have the EGU conversions automatically applied for them. Therefore, when a
customer is using a Modbus Client (Master) application that uses contiguous blocks of
modbus registers, the number of blocks can be minimzed. For DeltaV users, this minimizes
the number of serial ports that are needed, reducing licensing costs.

Entry Point
The Online configuration program O_Config is used to configure the Modbus Mappings. Modbus Mappings may be configured for each distinct CSI 4500 and CSI 6500 unit,
and the feature is available at the bottom of the right-click context menu for a unit:

O Config

J-53

J-54

Once Modbus Mapping is selected, the following dialog is displayed:

Modbus Mapping
The Available Modbus Registers list view displays all of the currently configured items
that have an associated Modbus register. The columns for each item are:
Channel: The channel number associated with the item.
Type: The type of item: AC, DC, AC/DC, DCS, DCS<#>, TACH, VTACH<#>.

J-55

There is a single Measurement Time Stamp associated with the AC and DC values, so the
Available Modbus Register Type is AC/DC and it applies to both the AC and DC readings for a given channel.
There is a single Measurement Time Stamp and a single Measurement Quality for all APs
in a DCS, so they will occur once for a DCS along with Alarm State/ Measured Value for
each AP.
There may be multiple DCSs and multiple virtual tachometers (VTACHs) associated with
a channel, so they have a number appended to the Type string (i.e. DCS1, DCS2DCSn
and VTACH1, VTACH2.VTACHn).
AP Name: The Analysis Parameter name.
Description: Alarm State, Measured Value, Measurement Quality, Measurement
Time Stamp.
Modbus Address:: Modbus Address.
The items associated with the unit itself and not any particular channel are listed at the very
bottom of the list view, and are highlighted in light blue. They do not have any text listed in
the Channel, Type or AP Name columns:

Items Associated with the Unit

J-56

The list view may be sorted by clicking on a column header (the light gray bar at the top
with Channel, Type, AP Name, Description and Modbus Address. Clicking on a column
header for the first time sorts the list in ascending order of that column's values; clicking the
same header again sorts the list in descending order. Additionally, the columns may be reordered by dragging and dropping the column headers in their new location on the column
header bar. Note that when the list is sorted, the unit information never moves from the
bottom of the list view; this behavior is intentional.

Mapping and EGU Conversion


The items in the Available Modbus Registers list view are mapped by selecting them and
then clicking the Add > button. The Add > button moves the mapped items to the
Mapped Modbus Registers list view, which displays the additional Virtual Address
column whose value represents the mapped Modbus register number that may now be
used to read a particular Modbus item. A single item is selected by clicking on it; multiple
items are selected by holding down the <SHIFT> key to select a range or the <CTRL> key
to select multiple values one-by-one. The following sequence shows the selection of all the
AC and DC values for channel 1 being selected and mapped used the default Mapping
Option, which is Automatic Virtual Address Numbering. First, the items are selected:

J-57

Automatic Virtual Address Numbering

J-58

Once the Add > button is clicked, the selected items are moved to the Mapped Modbus
Registers Table list view:

Mapped Modbus Registers Table

J-59

Mapping Options

Modbus Virtual Address Number


The three radio buttons in the Mapping Options group box at the top of the dialog are used
to control how the Modbus Virtual Address number is assigned when items are moved
from the Available to the Mapped list view.

Automatic Virtual Address Numbering


Since there was nothing in the Mapped Modbus Registers and Automatic Virtual Address
Numbering was selected, the first mapped item was assigned the Virtual Modbus address
of 0. Subsequent items follow in sequence from the first one, and are assigned numbers
based on the length of the preceding item. For example, since the first item (Channel 1 AC
Alarm State) starts at 0 and has a length of 1, the next item (Channel 1 AC Measured Value)
starts at 1; the next item (Channel 1 AC Measurement Quality) starts at 3 since the item
before it has a length of 2, etc. The length is based on the Modbus register data type. The
measured values are 32-bit, the measurement quality is 16-bit. Since standard Modbus registers are 16-bit, we say the length for quality is 1 register, and the length for values are 2
registers. In general, when Automatic Address Numbering is in effect, the next item to be
mapped always gets the next highest available number in sequence.

J-60

Manual Virtual Address Numbering


When Manual Virtual Address Numbering is in effect, the user is prompted for the first
number to use for the mapped Virtual Modbus address. Subsequent items follow in
sequence from the first one, and in the same fashion as described previously. For example,
the user selects Manual Virtual Address Numbering and chooses all the items for the first
DCS for channel 1:

Manual Vitrual Address Numbering

Mapping Options

J-61

When the Add > button is clicked, they are prompted for the Starting Virtual Address
Number to use:

If this number is less than the maximum of 65535 and does not overlap any existing Virtual
Modbus addresses, the items are mapped beginning with the Measurement Quality item
for channel number 1, DCS number 1. The Mapped Modbus Register now contains:

J-62

Convert Engineering Units Only


The Modbus Registration Mapping Program not only helps map, it has the additional feature of automatically applying scale factors to values. In some cases the user may decide
not to change the mapping, but would like to use the automatic scaling feature so scale factors don't have to be applied in the client application.
Mapped Modbus items representing a Measured Value will report that measured value
with the engineering units conversion already applied. For example, if channel 1 is an
accelerometer with a sensitivity of .1/EGU and the raw signal is 2.5 Volts, the measured
value for the mapped Modbus item is 25 EGU (i.e.G's), (2.5 divided by .1). To use existing
Modbus address numbers but have engineering units conversion applied, select the Convert Engineering Units Only option when mapping Modbus items. For example, to convert the measured value for the tachometer for channel 1 and also preserve the existing
Modbus register numbers for the other Modbus items associated with the tachometer, select them and click the Add > button:

Mapping Options

J-63

Now the tachometer items appear in the bottom of the Mapped list view with the Virtual
Modbus address equivalent to the native Modbus address. When an application reads the
measured value for the tachometer, it will not have to apply the engineering units conversion because its automatically already been done for it.

Renumbering Virtual Addresses


Once Modbus items appear in the Mapped list view, they may have their Virtual Modbus
registers altered by selecting rows, right-clicking, and then choosing Renumber. This
brings up the same dialog as when mapping with the Manual Virtual Address Numbering
option is used. For example, to renumber everything that has already been mapped, select
everything, right-click it and select Renumber:

J-64

To start the renumbering at 15000, enter 15000 when prompted by the Number Virtual
Addresses dialog:

Mapping Options

J-65

After the dialog is completed by clicking the OK button, the Mapped Modbus items are
renumbered, i.e. they are assigned a new Virtual Modbus address based on the starting
number just entered:

J-66

Potential Mapping Errors


Whenever a Modbus register is mapped, checks are made to ensure that maximum Virtual
Address of 65535 is not exceeded, and also that Virtual addresses do not overlap. For
example, if Manual Virtual Address Numbering was turned on and one tried to enter a
Starting Virtual Address of 70000, the following error message would be displayed:

If the user tried to enter a number between 15000 and 15024 (the Virtual Address numbers
already in use), the following error message would be displayed:

Mapping Options

J-67

Database .CSV
The Online Server writes out the Virtual Modbus Addresses to the units Comma Separated
Value (.CSV) file that contains information about the Modbus registers as well as the OPC
tags. This file is used by Online Service engineers as a reference when configuring external
programs to read Modbus registers and OPC tags. For example, the line in the .CSV file
that references the Signal Channel AC Measured Value for channel 1 will have 15001 in
the cell under the column Modbus Read Input Start Register instead of 0 since it has been
mapped. Note that if only a subset of the Modbus registers have been mapped, only those
mapped values will appear in the aforementioned column.

Miscellaneous Notes
The Modbus Mappings are persisted to the database template (.CVB) file, and they also are
archived along with the database by the DBZip process.

J-68

Glossary

Acceleration

the rate of change of velocity of a mechanical system. Usually measured in units of g (or
sometimes G) in English units;
1 g = 386.4 in/s2 = 32.2 ft/s2
The international standard unit is m/s2;
1 g = 9.806 m/s2
The sensor used to measure acceleration is the accelerometer.
Acoustic

the study of the characteristics of sound emitted by machinery. The Model 4500 can measure and analyze overall sound intensity levels as well as narrowband spectra and third
octave bands.
Archive

The permanent storage of extracted transient data from the 4500T's configured hard drive.
Alarm

an indication that the vibration characteristics of a machine have changed in a significant


manner.
Alarm Limits

represent amplitude levels that indicate an alarm condition on the machine being monitored. The Model 4500 allows alarm limits to be specified for the overall level and for each
of the individual vibration parameters.
Alarm Status

the status message that displays on each measurement point screen that indicates the alarm
status of this particular point.

G-1

Aliasing

an effect that results in erroneous frequency spectra when the frequency of the signal being
sampled is more than 0.5 times the sampling rate. The Model 4500 includes anti-aliasing
filters that eliminate these errors.
Amplitude

the magnitude (RMS, peak, peak-to-peak, average, or DC) of a measured signal.


Analog Integration

a method of converting from acceleration to the equivalent velocity signal or converting a


velocity signal to the equivalent displacement signal. Analog integration is superior to the
equivalent digital method as it produces fewer low-frequency components in the vibration
spectrum.
Analysis Parameters

divides the frequency spectrum into bands that are individually measured and analyzed.
Analysis Parameter Sets

includes up to 24 individual analysis parameters, and also contains instructions that tell the
machinery analyzer how to acquire data.
Area

a grouping of machines within a company or a plant for the purpose of predictive maintenance; may include the entire facility or a logical division thereof.
Autoranging

the process of automatically adjusting the input gain of an analyzer to match the amplitude
of a signal. Optimizes the use of the dynamic range of the analyzer and improves signal-tonoise ratio.
Averaging

a method of collecting data where the spectra are averaged together to eliminate random
noise.
Bandwidth

the analysis frequency range over which data will be collected. It can be specified as a frequency range in Hz, as an order-based analysis (for example 10xRPM), or in CPM.

G-2

Bode Plot

a graphic plot that shows how the 1xRPM amplitude and phase have varied with the RPM
of a machine. These are always measured over a startup or coastdown of a machine and are
used to identify shaft resonances and other signal characteristics.
Coherence

A function of frequency which describes the degree of linear relationship between two signals. Used to assess cross-channel measurement quality, locate noise sources, and to check
out transmission paths.
CPM

cycles per minute. Favored by many in machine vibration analysis because the vibration
caused by unbalance shows up at a frequency in CPM equal to the RPM of the shaft. 60
cycles per minute (CPM) is equivalent to one (1) cycle per second which equals one (1)
hertz.
Crest Factor

the ratio of peak to RMS levels of a signal. A single-frequency signal has a crest factor of
1.414; random noise has a crest factor of approximately 3; signals with impulsive content
have higher crest factor values. The crest factor can be used to check for impacting, such as
caused by rolling bearing defects.
Cursor

a manually controlled marker that can be moved across the plot display indicating frequency and amplitude at the cursor location.
Decibels (dB)

a logarithmic system of non-dimensional units that measures the size of a quantity relative
to a reference level. Any quantity can be measured in this way, as can any two quantities
with the same dimensions be compared using decibel measure.
Given a reference power (amplitude squared) level Wref, any other power quantity W,
having the same dimensions, may be expressed in decibels using the formula:

G-3

If a quantity X is in RMS amplitude units, and Xref is a suitable reference level, the formula
may then be rewritten using W = X2, to give:

Digital Integration

a method of converting acceleration to velocity or velocity to displacement by first collecting the spectral data and then digitally converting the spectra at each frequency. Digital
integration is less desirable than analog integration as it produces low-frequency components within the spectra.
Displacement

refers to the distance that an object has moved, usually measured in mils or microns. Displacement is often measured from eddy current probes and represents the physical movement of a rotating shaft.
Sometimes accelerometers or velocity probes are used, and the data is integrated into displacement. In this case, movement represents the relative displacement of the machine
casing where the probe is mounted.
Extraction

The process of reading and copying the data stored on the 4500T's configured hard drive to
the RBM database server.
FFT

Fast Fourier Transform; a mathematical technique which allows the time


waveform of a signal to be converted into a frequency spectrum.
Filter

an analog or digital device that removes or attenuates unwanted frequencies in a signal.


Frequency

number of times an event repeats in a specific period of time. Units are hertz (Hz equals
cycles per second) or CPM (cycles per minute).

G-4

Fundamental

primary frequency of rotation for a machine (1xRPM); usually causes the highest peak of
energy in the spectrum.
Fundamental Frequency

a peak selected as the basis from which harmonic peaks are marked.
gs

a unit of acceleration, commonly used with the English system of units; One (1) g represents the acceleration due to gravity at sea level and is approximately equal to 386.4 in/s2,
or 32.2 ft/s2 (9.806 m/s2).
Hanning

a shaping function applied to a time record before the FFT is calculated in order to smooth
out end effects and reduce leakage in the spectrum. Usually the default window type to use
when analyzing continuous signals because of the compromise between frequency discrimination and leakage suppression.
Harmonic

an integer multiple of a fundamental frequency.


Harmonic Marker

a marker that appears on a spectral display to indicate the harmonic peaks of a fundamental
peak.
Hertz

a unit of frequency equal to cycles per second (CPS), usually abbreviated as Hz. One (1)
hertz is equivalent to one (1) cycle per second, which equals 60 cycles per minute (CPM).
HFD

high-frequency detection; the amplitude of vibration in Gs over a broad frequency band


from 5 kHz up to 20 kHz or greater.
Impact Test

a type of test used to investigate the properties of a structure, in which the structure is caused
to vibrate by an impulsive load from an instrumented hammer, and the vibratory response
is picked up by a vibration transducer.

G-5

Integrator

see Signal Integration Mode.


Lines

the number of lines of resolution used for the spectrum calculation. Resolution (in Hz)
equals maximum frequency divided by the number of Lines.
Measurement Point

any location or point on a machine where measurements are made.


Mil(s)

a unit of measure for displacement (thousandths of an inch).


Model 4500

The phrase Model 4500 or the word 4500 includes both the 4500R and 4500S. Where
the 4500R is referred to separately, it is called 4500R. Where the 4500S is referred to separately, it is called 4500S.

Multiplane Balancing

a method of balancing a machine that allows the measurement of the imbalance at several
planes along the shaft of the machine. Correction weights are then added in each of these
planes. Multiplane Balancing, as opposed to single plane balancing, is usually required
when a machine has several rotating elements, such as flywheels, tightly coupled on a shaft
and closely spaced.
Nyquist Plot

a polar plot of the peak amplitude and phase of the 1xRPM vibration component across a
change in machine speeds. The Nyquist plot is typically used during startup or coastdown
analysis to identify shaft resonances.
Order Tracking

a measurement of a signal from a machine whose speed is changing with time,showing the
level of one or more orders as a function of machine speed or time.
Peak

the largest signal level seen in a waveform over a period of time. For sinusoidal signals, the
peak signal level is always 1.414 times the RMS value of the signal level. For non-sinusoidal signals, the peak level is often larger than the result that this formula would produce.

G-6

Peak-to-Peak

the difference between the maximum and the minimum levels (positive or negative) in a
signal over a given period of time. For a sinusoidal (single frequency) signal, the peak-topeak level is always two times the peak level and 2.828 ( 2 2 ) times the RMS level. For
non-sinusoidal (multiple frequency) signals this is no longer true and there is no simple relationship between peak-peak, peak, and RMS levels.
Period

the time required for one complete cycle of a periodic signal.


Phase

1xRPM phase represents the location of the shaft of a machine in degrees


(0 to 360) with respect to the tachometer pulse where the largest vibration occurs.
Plane

designates one or more of the rotating elements of a machine that is to be balanced. Each
plane lies perpendicular to the line that defines the axis of rotation.
Point

any location on a machine where measurements are required; used interchangeably with
measurement point.
Predicate

are expressions that evaluate to true or false. They may be used to define the event for collecting data or closing a relay.
Resolution

the frequency range represented by one line of an FFT spectrum. Found by dividing the
maximum analysis frequency by the number of lines. The resolution in Hz is equal to the
inverse of the data record length in seconds.
RMS

root mean square. When applied to a dynamic signal such as vibration or sound, refers to
an averaged level of a function obtained by averaging the square of the signal level over a
period of time (or number of data records), then taking the square root of the result.

G-7

Sideband

a frequency component that represents the effect of modulation on a signal. If a modulated


signal has more than one component, each component will show sidebands. A sideband is
spaced off from the frequency of the modulated signal by an amount equal to the modulating frequency. If the modulating signal has multiple components or if there is frequency
modulation, the sideband pattern may be very complicated including sum and difference
frequencies between the sideband component frequencies (intermodulation effects).
Spectrum

the frequency domain representation of a signal. In practical measurements, the spectrum


is usually displayed as a plot of magnitude verses frequency over a limited frequency range.
Subharmonics

vibration frequencies which are integer fractions of the running speed (example 1/2 RPM,
1/3 RPM, etc.) or some other fundamental frequency.
Tachometer

a device that generates a pulse signal corresponding to the revolution of a shaft; used to
measure turning speed. A single pulse per revolution may be used to trigger data acquisition
synchronously with shaft rotation.
Transient

a non-steady-state signal of brief duration; often refers to a startup or coastdown of a


machine. It can also be a bump in the night occurrence.
Trip Predicate

is a predicate used to signal that an event has taken place needing immediate attention. The
two types of trip predicates measured by the CSI 4500 are the Radial Trip Predicate and
Thrust Trip Predicate.

Trend

plotting a number of measurements of a parameter over time.


UNC

universal naming convention. For example, a UNC path for a network shared folder would
be \\computername\sharedfolder.

G-8

Uniform Window

analyzing a signal without shaping; no window is applied. Sometimes used for collection
of non-steady-state data.
Velocity

the rate of change of displacement of a mechanical system. Units are inches per second (in/
s or ips) in English units and m/s, cm/s, or mm/s in SI units. Can be measured directly with
a velocity sensor or by integrating an acceleration signal from an accelerometer.
Vibration Parameters

(also individual analysis parameters) up to 24 frequency band-limited parameters that are


measured from the vibration signal. These parameters are defined in the analysis parameter
set.
Waveform

analog or digital representation of a signal or function displayed as amplitude vs. time.


Window

see Hanning Window and Uniform Window.

G-9

G-10

Index

Numerics
4500 Unit
configuring A-13

A
AC Data Mode A-26
Adding a Data Collection Set D-2
alarm and reporting D-5
alarm and reporting control
backup timer D-6
reporting threshold D-6
collection D-8
predicate based D-8
time based D-8
tachometer D-10
validation D-13
Alarm and Reporting Control D-5
Alarm Limit 3-50
Alarm Limit Sets C-11
Alarm Limits
making changes 3-31
modifying 3-28
Phase C-16
Alarm List
Actions 3-25
Acknowledge 3-25
Filter 3-26
Find Associated Item 3-25
Alarm Source Tab 3-26
Alarm Time Tab 3-27
Alarm Type Tab 3-26
Context Menu 3-25
Alarm Log 3-22
Alarm Count and Display Check Boxes 3-23

purpose 3-22
using 3-22
Analysis Parameter Sets C-1
analysis parameters C-6
data acquisition C-1
Application Example
Step 1 - Open a Database Template 2-4
Step 2 - Configure the Hardware 2-5
Step 3 - Create Predicates 2-5
Step 4 - Define the Equipment to be Monitored
2-6
Step 5 - Connect to an Online Server 2-7
Step 6 - Commission the Hardware 2-9
Step 7 - Define Data Collection Sets 2-9
Step 8 - Begin Routine Data Collection 2-10
Archive a database I-6
Area B-5
Area View 3-7

B
Backup Timer D-6
Block Data - Backup Timer D-6

C
Card Configuration A-14
Channel Commissioning
digital I/O F-20
process signal F-12
tach F-13
vibration signal F-2
Collection Criteria
AL Set 1-14
AP Set 1-13

1-1

Predicate 1-14
Commissioning F-1
Commissioning - Digital I/O Channel F-20
Commissioning - Process Mux Channel F-12
Commissioning - Tach Channel F-13
Commissioning - Vibration Mux Channel F-2
Component B-9
Component View 3-10
Configuring
card configuration A-14
Generic Operations for Channels A-17
physical limits A-22
signal channel A-17
vibration channel A-19
Configuring the 4500 Unit A-13
Connecting to an Online Server 3-4
Constant Tachs A-42
Contents of this Manual
Appendix A - Defining Equipment to be
Monitored 1-4
Appendix B - Creating and Configuring
Hardware 1-4
Appendix C - Analysis Parameter and Alarm
Limit Sets 1-4
Appendix D - Data Collection Sets 1-4
Appendix E - Predicates 1-4
Appendix F - Commissioning 1-5
Appendix G - Plot Control User Interface
Functions 1-5
Appendix H - Online Server Program 1-5
Appendix I - Modifying and Archiving
Databases 1-5
Appendix J - Modbus/TCP CSI 4500 Slave 1-5
Chapter 1 Introduction 1-4
Chapter 2 Online Config 1-4
Chapter 3 Online Watch 1-4
Creating a Predicate Expression E-5
CSI 4500 1-1

1-2

D
Data Collection Sets D-1
Database
archiving I-6
making changes offline I-3
making changes online I-1
Digital I/O Channel Configuration A-40
Digital I/O Channels View 3-14
Discovery Method A-1
DSP Gain A-25

E
Equipment B-6
Equipment View 3-9
Executing Online Watch 3-3

G
Gross Scan AC and DC Limits B-35

H
Hierarchy
database objects 1-13
logical 1-14
physical 1-15
Hysteresis C-12

L
Live Trend 3-52
Logical Hierarchy B-2
Area B-5
component B-9
component report B-18
Database B-2
dB References B-3
equipment B-6
fault frequencies B-24
manufacturer B-11

measurement point B-20


monitoring information B-30
monitoring unit B-12
physical characteristic B-10
physical characteristics B-22
point definition B-21

M
Measurement Point B-20
Measurement Point View 3-11
Modifying and Archiving Databases I-1
Mux Channel Configuration A-17

N
Navigating the Hierarchical Database View 3-5

O
Offline Method A-6
Offline Modifications I-3
Offline modifications I-3
Online Client Application Interaction 1-19
Online Database
offline creation method A-6
Online Modifications I-1
Online Server 1-18
Online Watch Client 1-16

P
Phase Alarm Limits C-16
Physical Limits A-22
Plant Topology View 3-6
point definition
transient B-24
Predicate Expression
clauses E-6
creating E-5
operations E-6

removing a clause E-8


Predicates E-1
using E-3
Process Channel Setup A-26
Process Signal Channel Commissioning F-12

S
Signal (Mux) Channels View 3-13
Signal gauges 3-47
System Status
Area View 3-7
Component View 3-10
Digital I/O Channels View 3-14
Equipment View 3-9
How System Status is Displayed 3-6
Measurement Point View 3-11
Plant Topology View 3-6
Signal (Mux) Channels View 3-13
Tachometer Channels View 3-13
Unit View 3-12
Viewing Current Status and Data Values 3-6

T
Tach Channel Commissioning F-13
Tachometer Channel Configuration A-37
Tachometer Channels View 3-13

U
Unit View 3-12
User Interface Functions
plot control G-1
keyboard G-6

plot graph region G-1


X-axis G-4
Y-axis G-5

Using Predicates E-3


boolean logic E-4
comparison E-4

1-3

condition E-3
evaluating predicate E-4
inputs E-3

V
Vibration Channel Commissioning
acquisition definition F-5
channel setup F-8
data plots F-9
view parameters F-10
Virtual Tachometers A-38

1-4

You might also like